+------------------------------------------------------------+ | Transcriber's Note: | | | | Obvious typographical errors have been corrected in | | this text. For a complete list, please see the bottom of | | this document. | +------------------------------------------------------------+

Genuine Mediumship

OR

The Invisible Powers

BySWAMI BHAKTA VISHITA(Hindoo Master)

Author of Seership, the Science of Knowing theFuture

ADVANCED THOUGHT PUBLISHING CO. 812 W. Van Buren St. , Chicago, Ill. 

English RepresentativesL. N. FOWLER & CO. , 7 Imperial Arcade, Ludgate Circus, London, England

Copyright, 1919 By ADVANCED THOUGHT PUBLISHING CO. Chicago, Ill. 

CONTENTS

PART I. 

NATURE'S FINER FORCES

Knowledge versus Faith. Supernormal, not Supernatural. Supernormal, not Abnormal. The Prevailing Ignorance. PrejudiceAgainst the Unusual. Great Changes Impending. The Naturalness ofOccult Powers. The World of Vibrations. Super-sensibleVibrations. Unseen Worlds. Interpenetrating Planes and Worlds. Manifold Planes of Existence. Planes and Vibrations. The HigherSenses of Man. The World of Sensation. A Senseless World. TheElemental Sense. The Raw Material of Thought. The Evolution ofthe Senses. Unfoldment of New Senses. Discovery of New Worlds. WeSense Only Vibratory Motion. The Higher Planes of Nature. AnAppeal to Reason 7

PART II. 

MENTAL VIBRATIONS AND TRANSMISSION

The Higher Forces. Chitta, or Mind Substance. What Modern ScienceSays. A Living Dynamic Focus. Dynamic Correlate of Thought. Answer to Skeptical Critics. The World of Vibrations. UncharteredSeas of Vibration. The Human Wireless Telegraph Instrument. AGreat Scientist's Theory. Human-Electro-Magnetism. HumanEtherical Force. The Brain-Battery. A Peculiar Organ. The PinealGland. Transmission of Thought. A General Principle. Transformation of Vibrations. Example of Electric Light. Exampleof Wireless Telegraphy. Example of Light Waves. Transformation ofMental Vibrations. Vibrational Attunement. In Tune with theHigher Planes. Two Key-Words 31

PART III. 

THOUGHT TRANSFERENCE

Involuntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations. Thought Waves. Vibratory Thought Force. Mental Atmospheres. The Categories ofThought. Mental Whirlpools. Mental Tidal Waves. Immunity toThought Influences. Mental Attunement. Voluntary Transmission ofMental Vibrations. Voluntary Mental Influence. White Magic. BlackMagic. Base Use of Mind Power. The Secret of Witchcraft. ModernBlack Magic. The Explanation of Sorcery. The Power ofFearthought. The Negative Pole. Voodooism Explained. Self-Protection. Repelling Adverse Influences. TelepathicPhenomena. Scientific Investigators. How Experiments areConducted. Private Experiments. Development of Telepathic Power. "Mind Reading. " Development Practices. The "Willing Game. " FormalTests. Automatic Writing. Psychic Sensitiveness 53

PART IV. 

CLAIRVOYANCE AND KINDRED PHENOMENA

Clairvoyance Defined. The Phenomena of Clairvoyance. Classification of Clairvoyant Phenomena. Psychometry. The"Psychic Scent. " Magnetic Affinity. Distant En Rapport. PsychicUnderground Explorations. Psychic Detective Work. How toPsychometrize. Developing Psychometry. Varieties of Psychometry. Psychometric "Getting in Touch. " Psychometric Readings. CrystalGazing, etc. Crystals and Bright Objects. The Care of theCrystal. How To Use the Crystal. The "Milky Mist. " Classes ofPsychic Pictures. General Directions for Crystal Gazing. Selection of Place, etc. Adjusting the Crystal. Time of Sitting. Other Persons Present. Crystalline Vision. Physical Requirements. Determining Time of Fulfillment. Two Classes of Visions. Time andSpace in Crystal Gazing. Direct Clairvoyance. Trance Conditions. Clairvoyant Reverie. The Dawn of Clairvoyance. Methods ofDevelopment 79

PART V. 

CLAIRVOYANCE: PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE

Present Clairvoyance. The Human Aura. The Prana Aura. The AuricColors. Thought Forms. The X-Ray Sense. Microscopic Vision. SpaceClairvoyance. The Psychic Telescope. Radio-Activity. Sensing theHigher Vibrations. Viewing Distant Scenes. Time Clairvoyance. Past Time Clairvoyance. The Mystery Seeing the Past. Analogies ofthe Physical Plane. Thousand Year Old Light. Reading the LightWaves. The Akashic Plane. The Akashic Records. Degrees ofClairvoyant Vision. "The Memory of Nature. " InvoluntaryClairvoyance. Future Time Clairvoyance. Seeing What Has Not YetHappened. Simple Prevision. The Nature of Time. The OrientalTeaching. The Eternal Now. Absolute Time 105

PART VI. 

MEDIUMSHIP

What is Mediumship? Ancient Mediumship. Mediumship and ReligiousBelief. The Ideals of Modern Spiritualism. ImmortalityDemonstrated Through Mediumship. The Truth of Personal Survival. The Gateway of Mediumship. The Mediumistic Character. Mediumistic Sensitivity. The Higher Vibratory Forces. PsychicAttunement. The Development of Mediumship. UnconsciousMediumship. Mediumship and Individuality. Co-operation of Mediumand Spirits. Mediumship Not Dangerous. Rational Mediumship. The"Home Circle. " The Cure For Fraudulent Mediumship. Warning toYoung Mediums 133

PART VII. 

MEDIUMISTIC CONDITIONS

Physical Phenomena. "Psychic Force. " Human Magnetism. "Zoether. ""Prana. " Mental Phenomena. The Value of Phenomena. TranceCondition Not Essential. Scientific Reports on Phenomena. Phenomena Without Darkness. Test Conditions. Is DarknessNecessary? Developing Circles. Impersonating Mediumship. TheProper Mental Condition. Proof of Spirit Identity. The "TranceCondition. " Spirit Impersonation. Spirit Suggestion. PsychicAttunement. Automatic Writing. Inspirational Speaking. GradualDevelopment of Powers. Spirit Guides. No Loss of Individuality. Mediumship Beneficial. Mediumship and the Bible 153

PART VIII. 

HOW TO DEVELOP MEDIUMSHIP

Who are Mediumistic? The Mediumistic Temperament. Is MediumshipDesirable? Developing the Natural Power. Mediumship and Genius. Spontaneous Mediumship. Mediumistic Flashes. SystematicDevelopment. The Development Circle. The Aspirational Attitude. Natural Unfoldment. Persistent Watchful Waiting. Building Linesof Communication. Developing Concentration. The Call forIllumination. The Jacob's Ladder of Communion. What a DevelopmentCircle Is. Forming the Development Circle. The Sitters in theCircle. The Spirit Communication Code. The Matter of TimeConditions. Opening the Seance. Developing a Medium. ThePersonnel of the Circle. Changing the Sitters. Adding a Medium. Reasons for Changes. Psychic Attunement. Pre-Test Manifestations. Premature Tests. Forcing Tests. Spirit Directions. Questioningthe Spirits. Substance and Shadow 173

PART IX. 

MEDIUMISTIC PHENOMENA

The Part Played by the Sitters. Result of Bad Sitters. MentalAtmosphere of the Medium. The Mediumistic Mind. Mediumistic"Stage Fright. " The Psychic Telephone System. InterruptedCommunications. Some Difficulties of the Spirits. DifficultiesOvercome. The Psychic Triangle. Harmonious Relationship. TheDiscord Note. Antagonistic Elements. The Open Mind. Spirits andthe Sense of Humor. Rhythmic Harmony. Retarding Factors. Reasonable Demands of Spirits. Harmonious Conditions. The Channelof Communication. The Role of the Spirits. Difficulties AmongSpirits. Disturbing elements. Impersonation Mediumship. TruePurpose of Mediumship. Gradual Development. Public Seances. HomeCircle Development. Undue Prolongation of Seances. Good Advice toYoung Mediums. Self-Protection for Mediums 200

PART X. 

EXPERIENCES IN THE CIRCLE

Signs of Spirit Presence. Spirit Rappings. Table Tippings. TheSpirit Signals. Flashes of Communication. Spirit Code-Signals. Ouija Boards. A Homemade Ouija Board. Trance or InspirationalMediumship. Symptoms of Trance Conditions. The Entranced Stage. Trance Phenomena. Entering the Trance. Advice to Trance Mediums. Speaking Mediumship. Public-Speaking Under Control. Spirit Adviceand Counsel. Impersonating Manifestations. Incidents ofImpersonation. Incidents of Inspirational Mediumship. Value ofIdentification. Fraudulent Claims of Identity. Guarding AgainstFraudulent Spirits. Spirit Jokers. A Typical Case ofIdentification. Recalling Past Incidents. Identifying Property. Identifying Historical Personages 229

PART XI. 

HIGHER SPIRIT MANIFESTATIONS

Spirit Psychometry and Clairvoyance. Spirit Psychic Assistance. Writing Mediumship. Incidents of Writing Mediumship. DevelopingWriting Mediumship. Stead's Method and Results. Automatic Writingvs. Inspirational Writing. Use and Abuse of Automatic Writing. Advice to Writing Mediums. Drawing Mediumship. The Planchette. How to Use the Planchette. Healing Mediumship. How To Heal bySpirit Power. Materialization Mediumship. The Spirit Cabinet IsNecessary. How To Make the Spirit Cabinet. How To Use the SpiritCabinet. Spirit Phosphorescence. Appearance of MaterializedSubstance. Materialized Spirit Forms. Scientific Proof ofMaterialization. How To Conduct a Materializing Seance. TrumpetMediumship. Spirit Playing on Musical Instruments. IndependentSlate Writing. The Slate Writing Circle. Spirit Paintings. Practical Advice to Developing Mediums 251

PART I

NATURE'S FINER FORCES

One of the most common mistaken conceptions of the average student ofthe occult sciences, and of so-called "psychic phenomena" in general, isthat which may be expressed by the term "supernatural. " This term, asyou know, is used to express the idea of "that which is outside of therealm of Nature, and of Nature's laws. "

Knowledge Versus Faith

As a matter of fact, as all the advanced students and teachers of theoccult doctrine know full well, we have no direct knowledge whatsoeverof anything that is "outside of the realm of nature, and of Nature'slaws. " It is true that we may, by an act of faith, profess to believe inpowers and beings entirely apart from the great realm of Nature--infact, most persons do believe in such powers and beings in connectionwith their formal religion--but their belief is entirely within thecategory of Faith, and is not even pretended to be based upon actualexperience and phenomenal manifestation. 

The moment that there appears any manifestation which is possible ofbeing known to, or experienced by, the human senses, ordinary orextraordinary, that moment the phenomena and the immediate cause thereofmust be regarded as being properly classed in the category of "natural. "This is true not only of such phenomena as are perceived by means of ourordinary five senses, but also of those which are perceptible only tothe highest powers of perception, or higher senses, which are latent inall human beings but which are unfolded only in the case of acomparatively few individuals of the race. 

It should be clearly understood by all students of occultism or psychicphenomena that man's knowledge and experience, normal or supernormal, isconfined to the realm of Nature. There is a "ring pass-not" around theboundaries of the Kingdom of Nature which mortals cannot pass, no matterhow high may be their degree of development and advancement. Even thosegreat mystics whose writings are filled with the startling revelationsof "union with the Divine, " and of "At-one-ment with Deity, " are underno illusion concerning this fact they know full well that only in so faras Deity involves itself in Nature--wraps itself up in the garments ofNature--can it be directly experienced by man, and thus actually knownby him. 

Supernormal, Not Supernatural

Perhaps a clearer understanding of this important subject will be had ifwe but substitute the term "supernormal" for that of "supernatural. " Theterm "supernormal" is not commonly employed, and but few know that sucha word is to be found in the dictionaries, much less know its meaning;but a study of its meaning, and its adoption in our thinking, will serveto give us a clearer conception of the true nature of many strangephases of experience of which we have become conscious, either byreasons of their manifestation by ourselves, or else by themanifestation on the part of others. It will accordingly be well for usto carefully examine this term and its meaning. 

"Subnormal" means: "Beyond, above, or exceeding that which is NORMAL;extraordinary, inexplicable perhaps, but NOT supernatural. " Now, theterm "normal" means: "Conforming to a certain standard, rule, or type";hence, anything that is "supernormal" is something that is ABOVE THEUSUAL PATTERN, RULE, OR TYPE. 

There is an important distinction to be noted here, to-wit: a thing maybe OUTSIDE of the usual pattern, rule, or type, in the sense of beingINFERIOR TO or UNDER the ordinary standard, and in this case is known as"ABNORMAL, " the latter term being employed as a term of depreciation. Onthe other hand, the "OUTSIDE of the standard" quality may consist of aSUPERIORITY to the prevailing standard, and accordingly is entitled tobe classed in the category of the "SUPERnormal"--the prefix "SUPER"meaning "ABOVE, OVER, HIGHER, etc. "

It is important that the distinction be made clearly between the use andmeaning of these two terms, "abnormal" and "supernormal, " respectively. The first named denotes INFERIORITY, and the latter denotes SUPERIORITY. This distinction may be more clearly apprehended by means of a concreteexample, as follows:

On our own plane of existence the senses of sight and hearing, respectively, are included in the usual standard, pattern, and type ofsense normality--every normal person possesses these senses in a certaingeneral degree of power; hence, on this plane of existence, a personborn blind, or deaf, is spoken of as "ABNORMAL, " that is to say, such aperson is DEFICIENT in regard to the sense powers. 

On the contrary, let us imagine a plane of existence, in which thegreat majority of individuals lack the power of sight and hearing, respectively. On such a plane of existence, the occasional individualwho was born possessed of the powers of sight and hearing, respectively, would be properly regarded as "SUPERNORMAL, " that is to say, such aperson would be SUPERIOR to the ordinary run of individuals--above them, in fact. The term "ABNORMAL" means MINUS the ordinary standard quality;and the term "SUPERNORMAL" means PLUS the ordinary standard quality. Andyet both the "plus" and the "minus" would be "outside" the normal type, though there is a difference as wide as that between the two poles, inthis "outsideness. "

Supernormal, Not Abnormal

The above important statement concerning the distinction between the"abnormal" and "supernormal" is not made merely for the purpose ofacademic differentiation and classification. On the other hand, it ismade because there is a most pernicious tendency on the part of theignorant and unthinking portions of the public to regard and to classifycertain high phases of occult and psychic manifestation of power as"abnormal, " hence BELOW the standard; whereas, properly speaking, suchmanifestations of power are far ABOVE THE STANDARD, and, hence, clearlyentitled to the term "supernormal. "

The Prevailing Ignorance

The ignorant and unthinking attitude of certain portions of the generalpublic toward this class of phenomena is akin to that of a community ofblind and deaf persons, satisfied that their own "three sense" standardis the highest possible one attainable by living creatures and that allvariation therefrom must be considered as "abnormal. " In such acommunity there would occasionally be born certain individuals possessedof the senses of sight and hearing, in addition to the common threesenses possessed by the entire community. Judging by what we know of thetendency of human nature in such cases, we are warranted in conjuringthat the ordinary run of persons in such a community would revile theseeing and hearing individuals as "abnormal, " and their possessorstherefore to be pitied, and perhaps shunned. Only the intelligent andthoughtful members of such a community would be able to grasp the factthat these exceptional individuals were really not only not "abnormal, "and inferior to type, but that they were really "supernormal, " andsuperior to type. 

Prejudice Against the Unusual. 

Those to whom the above illustration may seem far-fetched, exaggerated, and unwarranted, are asked to carefully consider the ignorant andunthinking attitude which the great majority of the general public, atleast at first, present toward that most wonderful display ofsupernormal powers, known as "occult" or "psychic, " made by the fewhighly developed individuals of the race who are able to manifest themto some degree. These individuals are regarded as "queer, " and"strange, " "unnatural, " and "abnormal" by their ignorant and unthinkingneighbors and associates, just as the seeing and hearing exceptionalindividuals were likewise so regarded by their blind and deaf neighborsin the above illustration. And, here as in the illustration it is onlythe few intelligent and thinking individuals of the community whorecognize that the departure from the standard type is in the directionof advancement and gain, rather than of retrogression and loss--a plusattribute, rather than a minus one. The illustration is startlingly trueand in accordance with the facts of the case, as many thoughtful personsknow only to well, and admit sadly. 

Great Changes Impending

But it would be unjust and unfair to the general public were we to failto add to the above criticism the fact that there is underway a greatchange in the public opinion regarding this important matter. More andmore persons are becoming interested in Nature's Finer Forces every day;more are becoming more familiar with the phenomena manifested by thegifted individuals possessing these wondrous powers; and more are comingto realize that these powers are really latent in all of the members ofthe human race, though lying dormant in the majority thereof, and may beunfolded and brought into active manifestation by scientific methods oftraining and development. But, even so, the student and teacher of thisgreat subject should carefully bear in mind the important distinctionabove made between that which is "abnormal, " and that which is"supernormal"; and such should lose no opportunity in pointing out thisimportant distinction whenever the subject arises in conversation orargument--for the propaganda of truth should be earnestly and vigorouslypursued, in order that the world may be liberated from its chains oferror. 

The Naturalness of the Occult Powers

Returning to the subject considered in the opening paragraphs of thisbook, namely, the NATURALNESS of the occult and psychic higher powersand the manifestation thereof, we strongly advise all students of thesesubjects to acquire a working knowledge of the place in Nature occupiedby these powers and their manifestations. A little scientificinformation on this subject will render the student better able tointelligently teach others concerning these matters, and also tosuccessfully defend himself when the ignorant and unthinking seek toattack the things which are so dear to his heart, and so real andevident to himself. Many, by reason of their lack of scientificknowledge on these points, not only fail to make converts to their causeof truth, but often really drive away persons who might otherwise beinterested. Many persons are really interested in and attracted to themanifestations of the higher occult and psychic powers, but are fearfulof anything "unnatural" or "supernatural, " and are disposed to befrightened off by any suspicion of such qualities in things. These samepersons, if shown that the phenomena have a perfectly valid scientificbase in natural forces and laws, will throw aside their fears and willbecome earnest investigators and students of this great subject. Hence, as we have said, every teacher and student of this subject should knowthe true scientific natural basis thereof; and in the following fewpages we shall endeavor to plainly, though briefly, present these toyou. 

The World of Vibrations

Modern science furnishes abundant testimony to support and substantiatethe teachings of the ancient Hindu sages to the effect that everythingin the Universe is in constant motion, which is manifested by varyingrates, degrees, and modes of vibration. The modern scientists, alikewith the ancient occultist, knows that the differences between thethings of the Universe arise mainly from the different rates, modes, anddegrees of the vibrations manifested in the things themselves. If wechange the vibration of a thing, we practically change the manifestednature of that thing. The difference between solid ice, liquid water, semi-gaseous vapor, and gaseous steam is simply the difference caused byvarious rates of vibration caused by heat. The difference between redand blue, green and violet, is simply that caused by varying rates ofvibration. Light and heat, as well as sound, depend for the differencesupon rates of vibration. 

Super-Sensible Vibrations. 

Moreover, as every text book on science informs us, there are sounds toolow as well as those too high for the human ear to register, but whichare registered by delicate instruments. Again, there are colors beyondthe place of red, at one end of the visible spectrum; and others beyondthe place of violet at the other end of that spectrum, which the humaneye is unable to register and detect, but which our apparatus in thelaboratory plainly register. The ray of light which registers on thephotographic plate, and which causes sunburn on our skin, is too high arate of vibration for our eyes to perceive. Likewise the X-Rays, andmany other of the finer rays of light known to science are imperceptibleto the unaided human vision--they are actually "dark rays" so far as thehuman eye is concerned, though man has devised instruments by means ofwhich they may be caught and registered. 

The Higher Vibrations

The vibrations of magnetism and electricity are imperceptible to oursight, though they may be registered by the appropriate apparatus; andif we had the proper sense of apparatus to perceive them, these rays ofvibratory force would open up a whole new world to us. Likewise, if wecould increase our power of hearing-perception, we would seem to beliving in a new world of sights and sounds now closed to us. Reasoningalong the same lines of thought, many great thinkers have held thatthere is no reason for doubting the possible existence of otherworld-planes of being, just as real and as actual as the one upon whichwe live, and move, and have our being, but which is forever invisible tothe ordinary human sight and senses; the apparent nothingness of suchworlds arising solely from the great difference in the rates ofvibrations between the two planes of being. 

Unseen Worlds. 

Listen to what careful thinkers have said concerning the possibility ofentire worlds existing in the same space occupied by us, but of which weare unconscious by reason of our failure to sense their vibrations: Onesays, "All our sensations are due to the impact upon our sense-organs ofvibrations in some form. Variations in the strength and rapidity ofthese vibrations constitute the difference in our perceptions. Our rangeof response is but a limited one. Some vibrations are too rapid and sometoo slow to affect our senses, and therefore we have called to our aidvarious mechanical contrivances which enable us to recognize existenceswhich would otherwise remain unknown. But it is still conceivable thatthere may be, and doubtless are, conditions of vibratory energy thatescape us, and which, if we could develop finer senses, would yieldwonderful results and extensions of our power and knowledge. Today, indeed, we are coming into contact with forces, possibilities, andpersonalities which amount to a revelation of a new universe of things. "

Interpenetrating Planes and Worlds. 

Another says: "It is true that 'things are not what they seem'; buteverything seems to be 'thus and so' to us only because of itsparticular plane of being, and that plane of being is determined by itsvibrations. On one plane there is a certain vibratory value or speed;on another plane, a different one; but a plane is not a place, but astate, and so it is possible that two utterly different planes of beingmight co-exist in the same place and be entirely unknown to one another. That may seem absurd, but it is a scientific truth, and many authoritieshave endorsed the same. "

Another says: "There may be, right here and now, passing through us andthis world, some planet invisible to us, with mountains, oceans, lakes, rivers, cities, and inhabitants: and yet we know absolutely nothing oftheir existence. " Another says: "Some students of the occult find itdifficult to grasp the idea of a number of manifestations, each havingits own rate of vibration, occupying the same point of space at the sametime. A slight consideration of the phenomena of the physical worldwould perhaps aid such persons in assimilating the concept in question. For instance, as every student of physics knows, a single point of spacemay contain at the same time vibrations of heat, light of many shades, magnetism electricity, X-Rays, etc. , each manifesting its own rate ofvibration, land yet none interfering with the others. "

Another says: "Every beam of sunlight contains many different colors, each with its own degree of vibration, and yet none crowding out theothers. By the use of the proper forms of laboratory apparatus each kindof light may be separated from the others, and the ray thus split up. The difference in colors arises simply from the different rates ofetheric vibrations. Again, it is possible to send many telegrams alongthe same wire, at the same time, by using senders and receivers ofdifferent vibratory keynotes. The same thing has its correspondinganalogy in the case of the wireless telegraphy. So you see, even on thephysical planes we find many forms of vibratory energy manifesting on, in, and at the same point of space at the same time, without interferingone with the other. "

Manifold Planes of Existence

The ancient occult teachings have ever insisted upon the presence ofnumerous planes of existence, of which our own particular plane is butone. And all of these numerous planes are equally within the realms ofNature; none of them being supernatural. And there is always found toexist a correspondence between these several planes of manifestation;and, under supernormal conditions, a certain degree of possiblecommunication between them. Each of these planes has numeroussubdivisions and subplanes, the divisions being according to the rule of"sevens, " as follows: there are seven grand planes, and each of theseare subdivided into seven secondary planes, and each of these into seventertiary planes, and so on until the division has been made seven times. 

The student of occultism, particularly at the beginning of his studies, experiences difficulty in comprehending just what is meant by the term"plane" as employed in the occult teachings. His first impression, usually encouraged by the use of the dictionary, is that each "plane" isone of a series of strata or layers, above and below which are presentother layers or strata. Even after the student progresses in hisunderstanding of the subject, this original picture of material layersand strata tends to persist in his thought on the subject. The error, ofcourse, arises from his original conception of the planes, layers, orstrata as being composed of gross material matter, whereas, as a matterof fact, only one of the many planes is so composed. When one stops tothink that even the grossest form of matter is itself composed ofvibrations of energy (for science teaches that all matter is but energyat the last); and that all other forms of material substance is likewiseso composed of vibrations of energy; then one is on the road to thediscovery of the real state of affairs. Then he begins to realize thatinstead of the planes of being rising one above the other in the scaleof their fineness, they are graded according to their degree ofvibratory energy, and each may actually occupy the same space as all theothers. In short, the "planes" are not strata or layers of "matter" atall, but are simply different states of vibration of energy; and thatwhich we know as "matter" is simply one (and a very low one) of the manyforms of such vibrations. 

From the above, it is seen that the various planes of being are notdistinguished by spatial position; they do not lie one superimposed onthe other, like layers or strata of matter. Instead, they interpenetrateeach other in the same limits of space. A single point of space mayaccommodate the manifestations of each and all of the seven great planesof being, and all the subdivisions, and sub-divisions (sevenfold indivision) at the same time. The old occultists impressed this and otherfacts upon the minds of their pupils by the oft-repeated aphorism: "APLANE OF BEING IS NOT A PLACE OF BEING, BUT A STATE OF BEING. " And the"state of being" is simply a certain manifestation of vibratory energy. With these ideas firmly fixed in the mind, the student is less apt towander astray from the facts of the case. 

Planes and Vibrations

To those who may be disposed to regard the above statements concerningthe "planes of being" as somewhat visionary, theoretical, or imaginary, we would say: "Go to modern science, and verify this statement. " Thefollowing quotation from a writer on the subject will serve toillustrate this fact, viz. : "We are apt to think that we are familiarwith every kind of matter in existence, but such is not the case. We arefamiliar with only a few forms of matter. Spectrum analysis shows usthat on certain fixed stars there are forms of matter far different frommatter as we know it on this planet. On some stars this unknown matterappears to be of a much lower form of vibration than that manifested byterrestrial matter; while on others, there appears to be a much highervibratory rate than even that manifested by the most subtle forms ofultra-gaseous matter known to us here. Even on our own globe we candistinguish between several great class of matter. In addition to theforms called 'solid, ' 'liquid, ' and 'gaseous, ' respectively, science nowrecognizes a fourth plane of matter known as 'ultra-gaseous' matter, andthere are indications of several even finer states of matter, knownunder the general term of 'radiant matter. ' In fact, modern science sees'radiant matter' apparently fading away into 'radiant energy. '"

In view of the facts of modern science concerning the different planesof substance, matter and energy, it is mere stupidity that ventures toquestion the possibility of the existence of great plane of being andlife beyond the range of the ordinary senses of man--planes surroundingus on all sides, occupying the same space as we do, yet unseen by us, and we largely unseen by those dwelling upon such planes. 

The Higher Senses of Men. 

There are found persons who, while admitting the possibility of otherand finer planes of being and life, yet question the possibility ofcommunication between these planes of existence. They say, withapparently sound logic, "How is it possible for the human being, withhis ordinary senses, to 'sense' things or being, dwelling on finerplanes of being?" If this were all that there is to the question, wemight well echo "How, indeed?" and agree with the critic. But, this isnot all that there is to it--not even the beginning of the end of thetale. For not only may things on the finer planes become perceptible tohuman beings by means of the lowering of the vibrations of these finervibratory objects in certain ways, but human beings may develop andcultivate an increased power in their senses of sight and hearing, andthus raise their vibrations so as to "sense" the things of the highervibrations; and, still more, human beings may, and often do, developand cultivate certain latent powers of "sensing" which are inherent inevery one of us, and thus directly "sense" the sights and sounds of thehigher planes of existence, almost if not quite as clearly as they cansense the objects and events of their own plane of existence. Tounderstand how this can be, it is necessary to carefully consider thequestion of "sensing" in general, so as to understand just what enablesus to "sense" anything at all. Once understanding this, it is but a stepfurther to understand this SUPERNORMAL sensing referred to. Let us thenexamine this matter of "sensing" in general. 

The World of Sensation. 

The reports of our sense organs are called "sensations. " A sensation isdefined as "an impression, or the consciousness of an impression, madeupon the mind through the medium of a nerve or one of the organs ofsense. The term 'sense' is defined as 'a faculty possessed by animals ofperceiving external objects by means of impressions made upon certainorgans of the body, or of perceiving changes in the condition of thebody. ' Our senses have been well said to constitute 'the doors to theoutside world. ' Unless our attention is specially directed to thesubject, few of us even begin to realize how completely we are dependentupon these 'doors' to the outside world" for our knowledge of thatoutside world. It is only when we stop to imagine how completely shutin, or shut out, we would be if all of our sense channels should bedestroyed, that we can even begin to realize just how dependent we areupon our senses for our knowledge of the world in which we live, andmove, and have our being. 

A Senseless World. 

A writer on the subject has said: "Psychologists have pointed out to usthe fact that if a human being were born without sense organs, no matterhow perfect a brain he might have, his life would be little more thanthat of a plant. Such a person would exist merely in a dreamlike state, with only the very faintest manifestations of consciousness. Hisconsciousness would not be able to react in response to the impact ofsensations from the outside world, for there would be no such impact. And as consciousness depends almost entirely upon the impact of, orresistance to, outside impressions, his consciousness would be almostentirely inactive. He would be conscious of his own existence, but wouldprobably never realize the fact fully, for he would have nothing elsewith which to compare himself, and his self-consciousness would never bearoused by contact with things outside of himself. Such a person wouldnot have even the memories of previous sensations or experiences toarouse or heighten his consciousness or thought, and consequently hewould have no imagination to use. He would be, to all intents andpurposes, a living corpse. Helen Keller has only two doors of sensationclosed to her--the sense of sight and the sense of hearing. Touch, taste, and smell, however were left to her; and each was quickened andheightened in order to help so far as possible to perform the world ofthe defective senses. The reaching of the consciousness of this girl isconsidered by science to be akin to a miracle--yet only two senses weremissing. To appreciate the full meaning of the importance of the senses, one has but to think of Helen Keller as having been also deprived of thesense of touch. "

The Elemental Sense. 

Science informs us that all of the five senses of man, viz. , therespective senses of touch, sight, hearing, taste, and smell are butmodifications of one elementary sense namely the sense of touch; andthat the other senses have been gradually evolved from that oneelementary sense. This is seen to be the case when it is realized thatthe only way that we "sense" the presence of an outside object--be thatobject either a material substance, a vibration of the air, or anetheric vibration of light--is by that outside object coming in contact, directly or indirectly, with one or more of our sensory nerves, thelatter conveying the report of the contact to the brain, whichtranslates the sensation into what is called a "perception. " This istrue of the sensations of touch, sight, hearing, taste, and smell, andof senses higher than these and which as yet are not recognized byscience. Consequently, the consciousness of the presence of an outsidething arises from contact with that outside thing through the channel ofthe sense of touch, or of some of its more complex evolved phases. 

The Raw Material of Thought. 

From what has been said, it is seen that we can know only those thingsconcerning the outside world which are capable of being reported to usby means of sense impressions, simple or complex--all of our thoughtregarding the world is made up from "the raw materials of thought" whichpsychologists have termed sensations. Consequently, if an individual isdeprived of one or more of his ordinary senses, his knowledge of theoutside world is decreased to just that extent. And, likewise, if theindividual were to be given one or more additional senses, his knowledgeof the world would be increased in the same ratio. The same result, atleast in a certain degree, would be attained if the existing senses ofthe individual were to be increased in power so as to register higherrates of vibration than they now consciously register and record. 

The Evolution of the Senses. 

This subject of increased sense-powers has always been a fascinating onefor the psychologists, and much speculation has been indulged inconcerning the increased consciousness of mankind were additional sensesopened to it. We ask you to carefully consider the following quotationsfrom psychologists possessing the "scientific imagination. "

A psychologist says: "All the senses have been evolved from theelementary sense of Touch. All of our senses are but modified, specialized, and more complex forms of the sense of Touch. Theelementary life-forms possessed merely the sense of Touch; and that butfaintly developed--but a faint sensitiveness to outside impressions. Then developed the sense of Taste, from which later evolved the sense ofSmell, the latter even now being closely associated with the former. Then evolved the sense of Hearing, or the consciousness of the contactof air vibrations called 'sound. ' Then evolved the sense of sight, orthe consciousness of contact with the light waves of the other. And itis not impossible, or even improbable, that the human race willeventually develop other and more complex senses--in fact, many even nowclaim that the development of extra senses is now under way in the race, and that the same are now manifesting the presence and their powers inexceptional cases. "

Unfoldment of New Senses

The same writer continues as follows: "Even as it is man is able toperceive only a limited number of sound vibrations--there are many soundvibrations above and below his scale, and which he is unable toperceive, but which are registered by delicate instruments. Likewise, man is able to perceive only a limited range of light vibrations, therebeing enormous fields of such vibrations above and below his range. Again, man is unable to sense electrical waves, or magneticwaves--though, theoretically, he should be able to sense these as wellas light waves, the difference between these respective fields ofetheric vibrations being simply different rates of vibration. Imaginewhat a new world would be opened to man if he could sense the waves ofelectricity. In that case he could 'see' things as far away from him asthe waves of electricity could travel, and even though solid objectsintervened, as in the case of the X-Rays. In such a case a man mightactually 'see' things at the other side of the world, by means of'wireless electrical waves. ' Theoretically these things are possible, providing that man's optical nerves are rendered more sensitive, orprovided that he evolves a new set of sensory nerves and instruments ofimpression. "

Discovery of New Worlds. 

Another psychologist says: "If a new sense or two were added to thepresent normal number in man, that which is now the phenomenal world forall of us might, for all that we know, burst into something amazinglydifferent and wider, in consequence of the additional revelations ofthese new senses. " Another authority has said: "It does not seem at allimprobable that there are properties of matter of which none of oursenses can take immediate cognizance, and which other beings might beable to see in the same manner that we are sensible to light, sound, etc. " Another writer has said: "We know that our sensory nerves arecapable of transmitting to the brain only a part of the phenomena of theuniverse. Our senses give us only a section of the world's phenomena. Our senses usher only certain phenomena into the presence of our minds. If we had three or four new senses added, this might appear like a newworld to us; we might become conscious of a vast number of phenomenawhich at present never have any effect upon our nervous system. It isnot possible to imagine a race of beings whose senses do not resembleours, inhabiting other worlds. "

Transcendental Senses

Another writer has drawn an interesting picture, which is based upon aconjecture which is scientifically valid, as follows: "The lateProfessor James once suggested as a useful exercise for young students aconsideration of the changes which would be worked in our ordinary worldif the various branches of our receiving instruments happened toexchange duties; if, for instance, we heard all colors, and saw allsounds. All this is less mad than it seems. Music is but aninterpretation of certain vibrations undertaken by the ear; and color isbut an interpretation of other vibrations undertaken by the eye. Weresuch an alteration of our senses to take place, the world would still besending us the same messages, but we should be interpreting themdifferently. Beauty would still be ours, though speaking in anothertongue. The birds' song would then strike our retina as pageant ofcolor; we should see all the magical tones of the wind, hear as a greatfugue the repeated and harmonized greens of the forest, the cadences ofstormy skies. Did we realize how slight an adjustment of our own organsis needed to initiate us into such a world, we should perhaps be lesscontemptuous of those mystics who tell us in moments of transcendentalconsciousness they 'heard flowers that sounded, and saw notes thatshone'; or that they have experienced rare moments of consciousness inwhich the senses were fused organs is needed to initiate us into such aworld into a single and ineffable act of perception, in which color andsound were known as aspects of the same thing. "

We Sense Only Vibratory Motion. 

In assimilating the strange and wonderful conceptions of thepsychologists above quoted, concerning the possibility of a new world ofsensation arising from the possession of new channels of senseimpression, we must never lose sight of the basic fact that allSENSATIONS RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH VIBRATORY MOTION. An eminentscientific authority has said regarding this: "The only way the externalworld affects the nervous system is by means of vibratory motion. Lightis vibratory motion; Sound is vibratory motion; Heat is vibratorymotion; Touch is vibratory motion; Taste and Smell are vibratory motion. The world is known to us simply by virtue of, and in relation to, thevibratory motion of its particles. Those vibratory motions areappreciated and continued by the nervous system, and by it brought atlength to the mind's perception. "

The Higher Planes of Nature

In view of the facts and principles above set forth and considered, wemay begin to see that there is nothing "unnatural" in the hypothesisthat there may be reports conveyed to the consciousness of man by meansof higher vibrations than those of ordinary sound, or ordinary sight, providing that man has either (1) highly developed his ordinary sensesof sight, hearing, or touch to a degree sufficiently high to registerthese higher vibrations; or else has evolved and unfolded intoconsciousness certain latent faculties of sense-impression which arelying dormant in the great masses of mankind. In fact, the thoughtfulperson will be forced to admit that this new knowledge of the nature ofsensations, and of its relation to vibratory motion, renders extremelyprobable the truth of the great body of reports of such so-calledextra-conscious knowledge which the experience of the race has furnishedfrom the beginning of human history down to the present time. Such aperson will see that it is not a sign of "credulity" for a person toaccept such reports, so universally set forth; but that, rather, it is asign of "credulity" for a person to accept blindly the dogmaticassertions of the materialistic sceptics to the effect that "there is nosuch thing possible in the natural world, under natural world, undernatural laws--the whole thing is delusion or else deliberate fraud. "Such "know-it-all" persons are usually found to really "know much thatis not true, " and to lack knowledge of much that is true, regardingNature, her realm and her laws. 

An Appeal To Reason. 

Concluding these statements, let us say that the student of this bookwill find nothing contained within this book which is contrary toNature's laws and principles. He will nowhere in it be asked to suspendthe exercise of his reason, and to accept as facts things which violateall of Nature's laws. Instead, he will find at each point full naturalexplanations of even the most wonderful phenomena; and the appeal toaccept same will be made always to his reason, and not to his blindfaith or unreasoning belief. The student is urged to build his knowledgeof this important subject upon this solid rock of natural law and fact, and not upon the shifting and sinking sands of mere dogmatic assertionand appeal to assumed authority ancient or modern. 

PART II

Mental Vibrations and Transmissions

In the category of Nature's Finer Forces must be included that class ofmanifestations which are generally known as Telepathy, ThoughtTransference, Thought Force, etc. , all of which are based upon the factthat there is present in all such mental states as Thought, Emotion, Desire, etc. , a certain rate of vibratory motion, which motion iscapable of being radiated from the mind of the person manifesting themin such power and force that they may be registered with more or lessdistinctness upon the minds of other persons are at a greater or lessdistance from the first person. In the more common forms of itsmanifestation, such mental force or power is known as Thought Force, Mental Influence, etc. , and in its more pronounced and less commonphases it is known as Telepathy, Thought Transference, etc. , but thebasic principle is precisely the same in all of such cases, simple orcomplex though their manifestations may be. 

The Higher Forces. 

We may say here, frankly and plainly, however, that the advancedoccultists regard this class of phenomena as comparatively simple andelementary, and therefore not fully entitled to be included in the samecategory with the higher phases of Nature's Finer Forces, such as, forinstance, Clairvoyance, Psychometry, Communication with the HigherPlanes, etc. But notwithstanding this, we are of the opinion that anyand every one of the finer forces of nature, i. E. , any of the forceswhich are over and above the plane upon which the ordinary senses ofman, normally developed, ordinarily function and operate, should beplaced in one general category of the Higher Forces of Nature, particularly in a work of this kind designed for the instruction of thegeneral public upon these important subjects. Accordingly, these lessermanifestations of the finer forces in the natural world shall becarefully considered in this part of this book, so that the student maybecome acquainted with the scientific principles upon which they arebased, and may be enabled to develop the power of manifesting suchpowers if he choose to do so; and that he may understand the nature ofsuch forces and powers when they are manifested by other persons. 

Chitta, or Mind Substance. 

The Hindu Teachings hold that that which we call "Mind" is not anintangible something different from anything else in Nature, but that, on the contrary, it forms a part of Nature's general manifestation, andis a substantial thing. The Hindus have given to this Mind Substance thename of Chitta. Without going into metaphysical discussion, or enteringinto technical details concerning this Mind Substance or Chitta, we maysay that the Hindus believe it to be one phase of the greatManifestation which we call Nature--just as that which we call Matteris another phase of Manifestation--and, like Matter, having its ownparticular kind of force, or energy, its own rates of vibrations, andits own attribute of radiating its vibratory force or energy over space. Chitta manifests its activity in creating Thought, Emotions, etc. , andalso in receiving impressions from the outside world which it translatesinto perceptions and ideals. Chitta, or Mind Substance, is not regardedby the Hindus as being identical with the Soul, or the Ego; but, on thecontrary, they regard it as being an instrument for the expression ofthe activity of the Ego, or Soul, just as the Body is another kind ofinstrument. Both Body and Mind are regarded as being intended for theuse of the Ego or Soul, and not as identical with the latter. We shallnot discuss these distinctions further in this book, this subject beingapart from the general field and scope of the present work. 

What Modern Science Says. 

There are many to whom this conception of the vibration energy of Chittaor Mind Substance may seem strange. But such persons will be still moresurprised, perhaps, when they are told that modern science haspractically admitted the general truth contained in the Hindu teachingsconcerning the same, though modern science seems to cloak the facts ofthe case in technical terms so that the ordinary person is unable tocomprehend the real facts dwelling beneath these terms. To this latterclass we specially commend the following statement made by ProfessorOchorowicz, the eminent European scientist, a few years ago. ProfessorOchoriwicz says:

A Living Dynamic Focus. 

"Every living being is a dynamic focus. A dynamic focus tends ever topropagate the motion that is proper to it. Propagated motion becomestransformed according to the medium it traverses. Motion always tends topropagate itself. Therefore, when we see work of any kind--mechanical, electrical, nervic, or psychic--disappear without visible effort, thenof two things, one happens, namely, either a transmission or atransformation. Where does the first end, and where does the secondbegin? In an identical medium there is only TRANSMISSION; in a differentmedium there is TRANSFORMATION. 

"You send an electric current through a thick wire. You have thecurrent, but you do not perceive any other force. But cut that thickwire, and connect the ends by means of a fine wire, and this fine wirewill grow hot--there will be a TRANSFORMATION of a part of the currentinto HEAT. Take a pretty strong current, and interpose a wire still moreresistant, or a very thin carbon rod, and the carbon will emit LIGHT. Apart of the current, then, is transformed into heat and light. The lightacts in every direction around about, first visibly as light, theninvisibly as heat and electric current. Hold a magnet near it. If themagnet is weak and movable, in the form of a magnetic needle, the beamof light will cause it to deviate; if it is strong and immovable, itwill in turn cause the beam of light to deviate. AND ALL THIS FROM ADISTANCE, WITHOUT CONTACT, WITHOUT SPECIAL CONDUCTORS. 

Dynamic Correlate of Thought. 

"A process that is at once chemical, physical and psychical, goes on inthe brain. A complex action of this kind is propagated through the graybrain matter, as waves are propagated in water. Regarded on itsphysiological side, an idea is only a vibration, a vibration that ispropagated, yet which does not pass out of the medium in which it canexist as such. It is propagated only as far as other vibrations allow. It is propagated more widely if it assumes the character whichsubjectively we call emotive. But it cannot go beyond without beingtransformed. Nevertheless, like force in general, it cannot remain inisolation, and it escapes in disguise. 

"Thought stays at home, as the chemical action of a battery remains inthe battery; it is represented by its dynamic correlate, called in thecase of the battery a 'current, ' and in the case of the brain, I knownot what; but whatever its name may be, it is THE DYNAMIC CORRELATE OFTHOUGHT. I have chosen the name 'dynamic correlate. ' There is somethingmore than that; the universe is neither dead nor void. 

"A force that is transmitted meets other forces, and if it istransformed only little by little it usually limits itself to modifyinganother force at its own cost, though without suffering materiallythereby. This is the case particularly with forces that are persistent, concentrated, well seconded by their medium. It is the case with thephysiological equilibrium, nervic force, psychic force, ideas, emotions, tendencies. These modify environing forces, without themselvesdisappearing. They are imperceptibly transformed, AND IF THE NEXT MAN ISOF A NATURE EXCEPTIONALLY WELL ADAPTED TO THEM, THEY GAIN IN INDUCTIVEACTION. "

Answer to Skeptical Critics

The two most likely objections advanced against this conception bysceptical critics are as follows: "(1) The mental vibratory motion, orvibratory waves, are not known to science, nor recorded on scientificinstruments such as the galvanometer. What is the rate of suchvibrations, and what is their general character? (2) Granted theexistence of such vibratory energy, or thought-waves, how and by meansof what channel does the second person receive them from the firstperson? How are they registered or recorded?" These objections arecapable of being met in a scientific manner, to the satisfaction of anyfair-minded critic or investigator. We shall now give you, briefly, thegist of the answer of science to the aforesaid objections. 

The World of Vibrations

It is true that the scientific instruments of the laboratory, such asthe galvanometer, do not record thought vibrations. This, because suchinstruments are capable of registering and recording on certain ratesand modes of vibratory energy. Thought vibrations are registered only bytheir appropriate instruments, namely, the Chitta of Mind substance ofliving persons. As to the "general character and rate of vibration" ofthese waves of mental force, we can only say that their generalcharacter is that of "mental force" as opposed to "physical force. "

As to their rate of vibration, we can only say that this is notprecisely known, not having as yet been definitely ascertained; but itshould be added that THERE IS PLENTY ROOM FOR THESE VIBRATIONS in thegreat field of vibratory energy. Read the following paragraphs, anddecide this last matter for yourself. 

Uncharted Seas of Vibration. 

The following quotations from eminent scientists will serve to give thestudent a general idea of the views of science upon the question of thepossibility of the existence and presence of vibratory energy of kindsand characters as yet unknown to science:

The first scientist says: "There is much food for speculation in thethought that there exists sound waves that no human ear can hear, andcolor waves that no eye can see. The long, dark, soundless space between40, 000 and 400, 000, 000, 000, 000 vibrations per second, and the infinityof range beyond 700, 000, 000, 000, 000 vibrations per second, where lightceases, in the universe of motion, makes it possible to indulge inspeculation. " The second scientist says: "There is no gradation betweenthe most rapid undulations or tremblings that produce our sensation ofsound, and the lowest of those which give rise to our sensations ofgentlest warmth. There is a huge gap between them, wide enough toinclude another world of motion, all lying between our world of soundand our world of heat and light. And there is no good reason whateverfor supposing that matter is incapable of such intermediate activity, orthat such activity may not give rise to intermediate sensations, provided that there are organs for taking up and sensifying thesemovements. "

The third scientist says: "The knowledge we gain by experiment bringshome to us what a miserably imperfect piece of mechanism our bodies are. The ear can detect the slow-footed sound vibrations that come to us atthe rate of between 40 and 40, 000 a second. But the whole of space maybe quivering and palpitating with waves at all sorts of varying speeds, and our senses will tell us nothing of them until we get them coming tous at the inconceivable speed of 400, 000, 000, 000, 000 a second, whenagain we respond to them and appreciate them in the form of light. "

The fourth scientist says: "The first indications of warmth come to uswhen the vibrations reach the rate of 35, 000, 000, 000, 000 per second. When the vibrations reach 450, 000, 000, 000, 000 the lowest visible lightrays manifest. Then come the orange rays, the golden yellow, the pureyellow, the greenish yellow, the pure green, the greenish blue, theocean blue, the cyanic blue, the indigo, and finally the violet, thehighest degree of light which the human eye can register, and whichoccurs when the vibrations reach the rate of 750, 000, 000, 000 per second. Then come the ultra-violet rays, invisible to human sight but registeredby chemical media. In this ultra-violet region lie the X-Rays, and theother recently discovered high degree rays; also the actinic rays which, while invisible to the eye, register on the photographic plate, sunburnone's face, blister one's nose, and even cause violent explosions inchemical substances exposed to them, as well as act upon the greenleaves of plants, causing the chemical transformation of carbonic acidand water into sugar and starches. These forms of 'dark light, ' thatis, light too high in degree to be perceived by the human eye, are butfaint indications of the existence of still higher and still finervibrations of substance and energy. "

The Human Wireless Telegraph Instrument. 

Having seen that the first question of the sceptical critics is capableof being answered in the scientific spirit, and by ideas based uponscientific investigation, we now turn to the second question of the samecritics, viz. : "Granted the existence of such vibratory energy, orthought-waves, how and by means of what channel does the second personreceive these from the first person? How are they registered orrecorded?" This same question is also implied in the concluding sentenceof one of the scientists above quoted, viz. : "There is no good reasonwhatever for supposing that matter is incapable of such intermediateactivity, or that such activity may not give rise to intermediatesensations, provided that there are organs for taking up and sensifyingthese movements. " Let us see what science has to tell us regarding theprovision of Nature for the reception and "sensing" of this class ofvibratory energy. And the easiest way to ascertain the report of scienceregarding this important matter is to consider carefully whatrepresentative leading scientists have said concerning the same in theirwritings or public addresses. We call your attention to the followingquotations from such sources. 

A Great Scientist's Theory. 

Let us begin with that great master of modern science, Sir WilliamCrookes, the inventor of the celebrated "Crookes' Tubes, " without whichthe discovery of the X-Ray and Radio-Activity would have beenimpossible. Several years ago, this eminent scientist, addressing theRoyal Society, at Bristol, England, --a gathering made up ofdistinguished scientists from all over the world, most of the membersbeing extremely sceptical concerning occult phenomena--said to thebrilliant gathering: "Were I now introducing for the first time theseinquiries in the world of science, I should choose a starting pointdifferent from that of old (where we formerly began). It would be wellto begin with Telepathy; with that fundamental law, as I believe it tobe, that thoughts and images may be transferred from one mind to anotherwithout the agency of the recognized organs of sense--that knowledge mayenter the human mind without being communicated in any hitherto known orrecognized ways. * * * If Telepathy takes place we have two physicalfacts, viz. , (a) the physical change in the brain of A, the transmitter, and the analogous physical change in the brain of B, the recipient ofthe transmitted impression. Between these two physical events there mustexist a train of physical causes. * * * It is unscientific to call inthe aid of mysterious agencies, when with every fresh advance inknowledge it is shown that ether vibrations have powers and attributesabundantly able to meet any demand--even the transmission of thought. 

"It is supposed by some physiologists that the essential cells of nervesdo not actually touch, but are separated by a narrow gap which widens insleep while it narrows almost to extinction during mental activity. THIS CONDITION IS SO SINGULARLY LIKE A BRANLY OR LODGE COHERER [adevice which led to the discovery of wireless telegraphy] AS TO SUGGESTA FURTHER ANALOGY. The structure of brain and nerve being similar, it isconceivable that there may be present masses of such nerve coherers inthe brain, whose special function it may be to receive impulses broughtfrom without, through the connecting sequence of ether waves ofappropriate order of magnitude. Roentgen has familiarized us with anorder of vibrations of extreme minuteness as compared with the smallestwaves with which we have hitherto been acquainted; and there is noreason to suppose that we have here reached the limit of frequency. Itis known that the action of thought is accompanied by certain molecularmovements in the brain, and here we have physical vibrations capablefrom their extreme minuteness of acting direct upon individualmolecules, while their rapidity approaches that of internal and externalmovements of the atoms themselves. A formidable range of phenomena mustbe scientifically sifted before we effectually grasp a faculty sostrange, so bewildering, and for ages so inscrutable, as the directaction of mind upon mind. "

Human Electro-Magnetism

Professor Bain, another eminent authority, tells us: "The structure ofthe nervous substances, and the experiments made upon the nerves andnerve-centres, establish beyond a doubt certain peculiarities asbelonging to the force that is exercised by the brain. This force is ofa current nature; that is to say, a power generated at one part of thestructure is conveyed along an intervening substance and discharged atsome other part. The different forms of electricity and magnetism havemade us familiar with this kind of action. "

Professor Draper, another eminent authority, says: "I find that thecerebrum is absolutely analogous to in construction to any other nervousarc. It is composed of centripetal and centrifugal fibres, having alsoregistering ganglia. If in other nervous arcs the structure is merelyautomatic, and can display no phenomena of itself, but requires theinfluence of an external agent--the optical apparatus inert save underthe influence of light, the auditory save under the impression ofsound--the cerebrum, being precisely analogous in its elementarystructure, presupposes the existence of some agent to act through it. "

Prof. M. P. Hatfield has said: "The arrangement of the nerve-envelopesis so like that of the best constructed electrical cables that we cannothelp thinking that both were constructed to conduct something very muchalike. I know that there are those who stoutly maintain that nerve forceis not electricity, and it is not in the senses that an electricalbattery is not the same thing as a live man; but, nevertheless, nerve-force is closely allied to that wonderful thing that for want of abetter and clearer understanding we agree to call 'electricity. '"

Human Etheric Force. 

Professor Haddock, a popular writer along the lines of scientificpsychology and kindred subjects, in a part of his work in which he wasconsidering the idea that thought may be communicated by means ofether-vibrations, forcibly says: "The ether is accepted by science as areality, and as a medium for light, heat, electricity, magnetism, etc. The nervous system is certainly comparable to an electric battery withconnecting wires. Communications of thought and feeling without themediation of sense-perceptions as commonly understood, is nowestablished. Inanimate objects exert, now and then, 'strangeinfluences. ' People certainly carry with them a personal atmosphere. Therepresentation of the condition of these facts by a psychic field, compared to the magnetic or electric field, becomes, therefore, if notplausible, at least convenient. As such a 'field' exists surrounding thesun, so may a 'field' be assumed as surrounding each human individual. 'We have already strong grounds for believing that we live in a mediumwhich conveys to-and-fro movements to us from the sun, and that thesemovements are electro-magnetic, and that all the transformation of lightand heat, and indeed the phenomena of life, are due to the electricalenergy which comes to us across the vacuum which exists between us andthe sun--a vacuum which is pervaded by the ether, which is a fit mediumfor the transmission of electro-magnetic waves. ' By means, then, of asimilar theory applied to mind and brain and body, we may findreasonable explanations of many otherwise insoluble mysteries of life, and, which is of more importance, deduce certain suggestions for thepractical regulation of life in the greatest individual interest. "

The Brain-Battery. 

The same writer says: "All states of body and mind involve constantmolecular and chemical change. The suggestion arises that the brain, with its millions of cells and its inconceivable changes in substance, may be regarded as a transmitting and receiving battery. The brain beinga kind of battery, and the nerves being conductors of released stored-upenergy to different parts of the body, by a kind of action similar tothe actions of electricity and magnetism, it is suggested that, eitherby means of the ether, or of some still finer form of matter, dischargesof brain energy may be conducted beyond the limits of the body. If thenerve-track corresponds to wires, this refined medium may correspond tothe ether-field supposed to be employed in wireless telegraphy. Aselectrical movements are conducted without wires, or other visiblemedia, so may brain-discharges be conveyed beyond the mechanism of thebattery, without the intervention of nerves--except as they mayconstitute a part of the battery. Generally speaking, such dischargeswould originate in two ways, viz. , by direct mental action, or by mentalor physical states--perhaps by a combination. "

A Peculiar Organ

So much for the conceptions of modern western science, which agree inthe main with those of the ancient oriental occultists, although ofcourse different names and terms are employed. But, we think it worthwhile to call your attention to the fact that the western scientistshave failed to note the significant presence of a peculiar organ in thehuman body, which is regarded as most important in its functions andoffices by the oriental teachers, and which we believe has a very closeconnection to the subject just discussed by the western scientists. Werefer to that strange organ or gland known to western science as thePineal Gland. Let us see just what this is. 

The Pineal Gland

The Pineal Gland is a mass of nervous substance which is found locatedin the human brain in a position near the middle of the skull, almostdirectly above the extreme top of the spinal column. It is shaped like asmall cone, and is of a reddish-gray color. It lies in front of thecerebellum, and is attached to the third ventricle of the brain. Itcontains a small quantity of peculiar particles of a gritty, sand-likesubstance, which is commonly known as "brain sand. " It derives itsscientific name from its shape, which resembles a pine-cone. Westernphysiologists are at sea regarding the function and office of thisinteresting organ, or gland, and the text books generally contentthemselves with stating that "the functions of the Pineal Gland are notunderstood. " The oriental occultists, on the other hand, claim that thePineal Gland, with its peculiar arrangement of nerve-cell corpuscles, and its tiny grains of "brain-sand, " is intimately associated withcertain forms of the transmission and reception of waves of mentalvibrations. Western students of occultism have been struck with theremarkable resemblance between the Pineal Gland and a certain part ofthe receiving apparatus employed in wireless telegraphy, the latter alsocontaining small particles which bear a close resemblance to the"brain-sand" of the Pineal Gland; and this fact is often urged by themto substantiate the theory of the oriental occultists concerning thefunction and office of this interesting organ of the human body which islocated in the brain of man. 

Transmission of Thought. 

Many other facts set forth by modern western science could be cited inour consideration of the question of the existence of any possible organfor the reception of thought vibrations, but it is thought thatsufficient evidence of this kind has already been submitted to yourattention--sufficient to remove any reasonable doubts, and to give thestudent at least a clear and open mind on the subject. Summing up suchevidence, we may say that modern science is fast approaching theposition which is so well expressed by Camille Flammarion, the eminentFrench scientist, as follows: "The action of one mind upon another at adistance--the transmission of thought, mental suggestion, communicationat a distance--all these are not more extraordinary than the action ofthe magnet on iron, the influence of the moon on the sea, thetransportation of the human voice by electricity, the revolution of thechemical constituents of a star by the analysis of its light, or, indeed, all the wonders of contemporary science. Only these psychiccommunications are of a more elevated kind, and may serve to put us onthe track of a knowledge of human nature. What is certain is this: ThatTelepathy can and ought to be henceforth considered by Science as anincontestible reality; that minds are able to act upon each otherwithout the intervention of the senses; that psychic force exists, though its nature is yet unknown. "

A General Principle. 

At this point we wish to impress upon the minds of the students of thisbook that what has been above said regarding that class of mentalcommunications generally classed under the head of Telepathy alsoapplies to many much higher phases of occult phenomena and psychicmanifestations. In fact, this is one of the reasons why we have paidsuch close attention to the scientific evidence substantiating thisclass of phenomena. It is not too much to say that in what has been saidin the foregoing pages there is to be found a scientific basis for thephenomenon of "spirit communication, " at least in many of its phases. Itis but a step in thought--and a natural and easy step at that--from thematter of the communication of thought from the mind of one person orthe material plane of life to another person on the same plane, on tothe matter of the communication of thought from the mind of anindividual entity on a higher plane of life to a second person who isabiding on the lower material plane occupied by us at this stage of ourexistence. It is seen that the difference consists largely in the matterof the degree and rate of vibratory energy employed, and the preparationof a proper receiving instrument for the reception and translation ofsuch messages. This phase of the subject will be considered in fullerdetail in a subsequent portion of this book. 

Transformation of Vibrations. 

One of the things which seem to greatly puzzle the average student ofthe subject of mental vibrations, and thought-transference, is thatwhich may be called "thought waves. " The student is unable to conceiveof a wave of "thought" being projected into the air, and then travelingalong until it reaches the mind of other persons. The difficulty, uponanalysis, is seen to consist of the inability to conceive of "thought"as being a material substance capable of traveling in "waves. " It is nowonder that the student finds this conception difficult, for there is nosuch thing as "thought" traveling in this way. The phenomenon of thoughttransference is accounted for scientifically in quite another manner, aswe shall see in a moment. The student is advised to carefully note thisdistinction, for upon its understanding depends greatly the intelligentcomprehension of the entire subject of thought vibrations andthought-transference. 

Example of Electric Light

Perhaps this matter may be best explained by means of illustrations ofthe operation of electricity and light--electric vibrations and lightvibrations. In both cases the secret of the transmission of thevibrations or waves of vibratory energy may be summed up in the word"TRANSFORMATION. " For instance: When we transmit electric vibrationsover a fine wire or thread of carbon, the electric vibrations aretransformed into light vibrations and manifest as "electric light. " Inanother form of transmission the electric vibrations are transformedinto "electric heat. " But this is merely one phase of thetransformation; consider carefully the more complex phases, as follows:We speak into the receiver of a telephone and the sound vibrationsproduced by our voice are transformed into electrical vibrations and inthat form travel over the telephone wire; arriving at the other end ofthe wire, these electric vibrations enter into the receiver, and arethere transformed into sound vibrations, and as such are heard by theperson holding the receiver. Now note this: the sound vibrations do nottravel at all; instead, they are transformed into electric waves, whichin turn are transformed at the receiving end of the line into soundvibrations once more. And unless the receiving apparatus be present, andproperly adjusted, there is no second transformation at all; and in suchcase the electric vibrations remain such. 

Example of Wireless Telegraphy. 

Likewise, in the case of the wireless telegraphy, the electric energyproduced by the sending instrument is transformed into subtle and fineretheric waves, which travel to the receiving instrument, and are theretransformed into electric waves, the latter producing physical changesin the receiving apparatus which enable them to be read by the observer. In the case of wireless telephony there is still more complex process oftransformation, as follows: the speaker conveys sound vibrations intothe instrument; these are transformed into electric vibrations; and thelatter into the etheric vibrations which travel through space to thereceiver. Reaching the receiver, the etheric vibrations are transformedinto ordinary electric vibrations, and these in turn into sound wavescapable of being sensed by the listener. 

Example of Light Waves. 

The same process is detected in the transmission of what we call lightwaves. The activities manifested by the substance of the sun set upcertain vibrations which we call "light vibrations. " These arecommunicated to the ether in the form of so-called "light waves" butwhich are merely etheric waves of a certain rate of vibration. Thesewaves travel through space and are transformed into "light" only whenthey reach some material substance capable of receiving and reflectingtheir vibrations. Science tells us that empty space is perfectly DARK, and that light manifests only when the etheric light vibrations come incontact with material substance and are there transformed into "light. "Light, as "light" does not travel from the sun--what we know as "light"is simply the result of the transformation of certain etheric waves into"light" by reason of their contact with material substances. 

Transformation of Mental Vibrations

Now for the analogy. Mental vibrations are so only when they remain intheir own uninterrupted medium of channel of activity, i. E. , the brainand the nervous system of the individual. Many hold that they are ableto leap over the barrier of flesh separating two persons when suchpersons are in immediate physical contact, and the conditions are of acertain kind; but as a rule they do not do so. But, as all investigatorsknow, mental vibrations are capable of being transformed into somesubtle form of etheric vibrations, and the latter when coming in contactwith the nervous system of other persons may be again transformed, thistime into mental vibrations which produced thoughts, feelings and mentalimages in the minds of the second persons or persons, corresponding withthese mental states in the first person. Think over this carefully, until you grasp the idea fully. 

Vibrational Attunement

And here we find another startling correspondence between the phenomenaof wireless telegraphy and that of thought transference or transmissionof mental vibrations. We allude to the fact that while a wirelesstelegraphic sending instrument may be sending forth vibrations of thestrongest power, its messages are capable of being received or "pickedup" only by those instruments which are "in tune" with the sendinginstrument to at least a certain degree; to all other instruments, thosewhich are not "in tune" with the sending instrument, there is no messageperceptible. Precisely this same state of affairs is found to prevail inthe realm of mental vibrations and thought transmission. The individualreceives only such messages as emanate from instruments with which he is"in tune"--to all the rest he is deaf and unconscious. But once "intune" with the higher vibrations of the mental realm, he will receiveevery message traveling on that particular plane at that particulartime, unless he deliberately shut them out. We shall see how this worksout in ordinary life, when we consider the general subject of Telepathyand Thought Transference in the succeeding Chapter. 

In Tune With Higher Planes

But, in connection with the above statement of the "in tune" law or ruleof manifestation, we wish to call to the attention of the student theimportant fact that the same law prevails in the case of communicationsfrom the higher planes of existence--the so-called "spiritcommunications" and other messages of this kind reaching individuals onour own plane of existence. It is only when the individual on the"earth plane" becomes "in tune" with the sending mental instrument ofthe entity abiding on a higher plane of existence, that it is able to"pick up" the message being sent to earth. Even the same individual isoften unable to "catch" the messages at one time, while at other timeshe experiences no difficulty whatsoever. An understanding of thisfact--this law or rule of manifestation--will throw a great light overmany dark places of misunderstanding and perplexity concerning certainphases of occult and psychic phenomena. This feature of such phenomenawill be considered in detail in subsequent parts of this book. 

The Two Key-Words. 

Concluding our consideration of the "just how" of the transmission ofthoughts, messages, and "psychograms" between two minds, be they both onearth plane, or one of the two on the higher planes, we would say:"Always remember the two Key-Words, namely TRANSFORMATION andATTUNEMENT. " These two Key-Words will enable you to unlock many doors ofthought on these subjects--doors which otherwise will remain closed toyou. 

PART III

THOUGHT TRANSFERENCE

The most elementary and simple form in which mental vibrations aretransmitted is that which may be called Thought Transference. In thecategory of Thought Transference may be included two quite generalclasses, as follows: (1) Involuntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations, and (2) Voluntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations, commonly known asTelepathy. In this part of this book both of these general classes ofThought Transference shall be considered in some detail. 

Involuntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations. 

Mental vibrations emanating from the brain of the individual take on theform of wave-like movements in the ether, which are accordingly known as"thought-waves. " These thought-waves are constantly being sent forthfrom the brains of all persons, and after being sent forth they spreadin space from the immediate neighborhood of the person originating them, to a distance proportioned to the strength and power energizing theoriginal mental state. These thought-waves have the power of awakeningand arousing into activity corresponding mental states in other personscoming within their field of force, according to the laws of MentalInduction. It should be noted here that the activity aroused in the mindof the receiving person is accomplished by the setting into vibratorymotion the Chitta or Mind-substance of that person, just as thereceiving diaphragm of the telephone is set vibrating at the same rateas that of the sending instrument, and thus the original sound-waves arereproduced. 

Thought Waves

Thought-waves are manifested in various forms, modes, and phases, and indifferent degrees of power. Some are emanated without any clearlydefined desire or intent to accomplish certain ends, while others arecharged with strong desire focused to a definite point by clear-cutideas of ends sought to be accomplished. The latter, however, areusually entitled to be classed among the "involuntary" phases of ThoughtTransference, because the senders are generally unaware thatthought-waves have an actual effect upon the minds of other persons;their thoughts and mental states arising in accordance with theirfeelings, desires, and general aims. Where the individual has learnedthat thought is an active power, he may deliberately send forth histhought-waves directed toward the person or persons whom he wishes toaffect and influence. 

The student must remember, however, that there is a great difference inthe power and effective activity between thought-waves sent forth underdifferent circumstances. Some are sent forth idly, and with no focusedpower or energy of desire and feeling, and such naturally are weak ineffect upon others. Others are sent forth vitalized with strong desireand feeling, and focused with a clear ideal and mental picture, and, consequently, exert a far greater degree of effect upon the minds ofothers with whom they come in contact. The analogy of the waves ofelectricity holds good here, for just as the electric power may bestrong or weak, as the case may be, so may the mental force be strong orweak under different circumstances, and in different individuals. 

Vibratory Thought Force

The vibratory force of thought-waves persist for some time after theiroriginal emanation. Here, also we have analogies on the physical plane, as follows: The heat of a room continues for some time after the firewhich originally caused it has ceased to burn. Likewise, the air of aroom may manifest the perfume of a flower, or extract, long after thelatter has been removed from the room. Again, rays of light persist inexistence long after the star manifesting them has been blotted out ofexistence. In the same way thought-vibrations continue to manifest in aplace, large or small though its space may be, long after the originalsender has passed from that plane--perhaps even long after he has passedfrom earth life. 

Mental Atmospheres

A well known American writer on this subject has said concerning thispoint: "There are many places today filled with the thought-vibrationsof minds long since passed out of the body. There are places filled withthe strong vibrations of tragedies long since enacted there. Every placehas a mental atmosphere of its own, the same arising from thethought-vibrations set in motion by the various persons who haveinhabited or occupied them. Every city has its own mental atmospherewhich has its effect upon persons moving into them. Some are lively, some dull, some progressive, some old-fogyish, some moral, someimmoral--the result of the character of the early settlers and leadingspirits, of the place in question. Persons moving into these towns areaffected by the mental atmospheres thereof, and either sink to thegeneral level, or else, if strong enough, help to change the mental toneof the place. Sometimes a change in conditions bring a large influx ofnew people, to a town, and the mental waves of the newcomers tend tobring about a marked change in the local mental atmosphere. These factshave been noticed by many observing people who often have not beenfamiliar with the principles underlying and producing the facts whichthe observers have so clearly discerned. "

The Contagion of Thought. 

The same writer says, along the same general lines: "Many have of coursenoticed the differing mental atmospheres of stores, offices, and otherplaces of business. Some of such places give one an air of confidenceand trust; others create a feeling of suspicion and distrust; someconvey an impression of active, wideawake management, while othersimpress one as being behind the times, and suffering from a want ofalert, active management. These differing mental atmospheres are causedby the different prevailing mental attitudes of the owners of therespective establishments. The managers of business places send forththought-waves of their own, and their employees naturally falling intothe pace set for them also send forth similar vibrations, and beforelong the whole place is vibrating on a certain scale. A change ofmanagement soon produces a marked change in the entire mental atmosphereof the place. In the same way, we notice the mental atmospheres of thehouses we happen to visit; in this way we become conscious of an entiremental scale of many notes, the notes being sounded unconsciously by theminds of the occupants of the houses. From some thresholds radiateharmony, while others breathe the spirit of inharmony. Some radiateemotional warmth, while others chill one like an iceberg, by reason ofthe emotional coldness of the dwellers therein. Likewise, the lowquarters of our cities, the dens of vice, and the haunts of dissipationvibrate with the character of the thought and feeling of thoseinhabiting them. And, often, the weak-willed visitor is thus tempted. Inthe same way, certain other places are charged with the vibrations ofstrong, helpful, elevating mental states, which tend to lift up andelevate, energize and stimulate the minds and feelings of those visitingthese places. Thought and feeling are contagious, by reason of the lawsof mental vibration and mental induction. "

Mental Whirlpools. 

The contagion of thought-vibrations is manifested by such vibrationscoming into contact with the minds of other persons within the field ofmental induction of the first person, and there setting up similarvibrations. We know that orators, actors, preachers and othersaddressing audiences of persons, send forth strong mental currentswhich tend to awaken corresponding vibrations in the minds of theirhearers. We weep, smile, grow angry, feel happy, according to thecharacter of the thought-waves, of the person on the platform or thestage, providing that we accept the same. And, according to the sameprinciple, persons scattered over large areas are influenced andaffected in the same way by whirlpools of mental vibrations set intooriginal motion by some strong, masterful public man. A writer has saidconcerning this point:

Mental Tidal Waves

"We know how great waves of feeling spread over a town, city, or county, sweeping people off their feet, and causing them to lose their balance. Great waves of political enthusiasm, or war-spirit or prejudice for oragainst certain people, or groups of people, sweep over places and causemen to act in a manner which they afterward often regret when they cometo themselves and consider the matter in the light of cold reason. People are swayed by demagogues or magnetic leaders who wish to capturetheir votes or patronage; and they are often led into acts of mobviolence, or similar atrocities, by yielding to these waves ofcontagious thought. On the other hand, we know equally well how greatwaves of religious emotion spread out over the community upon theoccasion of some great 'revival' excitement or religious fervor. "

Immunity to Thought Influences

Persons becoming acquainted for the first time with the above recitedfacts of mental vibrations, mental currents, mental waves, and mentalcontagion, frequently raise the objection that if all this be true, whyare we not constantly swept off of our feet by these great waves ofmental vibrations, whereas, in fact, we are seldom or never aware ofthem? The question is a natural one, and is capable of a satisfactoryanswer. In the first place, many of these mental currents NEUTRALIZEeach other, and thus both cease to exert any marked effect. And again, most persons are really "immune" to most of the thought waves reachingthem, this by reason of the protective resistive power bestowed byNature, and acquired during the evolution of the race. 

To understand this, we have but to think of our immunity to the greatmajority of sounds and sights on the streets of a busy city. On a busystreet corner, we are assailed by an infinitude of sounds andsights--but we hear but few of these, and see still fewer. The rest ofthese impressions are lost to us, although we have ears to hear and eyesto see. We hear and see only those impressions which are strong enoughto awaken our ATTENTION. In the same way we fail to perceive thenumerous thought vibrations and mental currents constantly surroundingus, and our attention is attracted and awakened by those sufficientlystrong and vigorous to awaken our attention. The analogy is a very closeone, and the understanding of one set of phenomena gives us the key tothe other. 

Mental Attunement

It should not fail to be noticed, moreover, that we habitually receiveand accept more readily those thought vibrations which are in harmonywith our own average habitual mental states; and, according to the samegeneral principle, we tend to habitually reject and fail to receivethose vibrations which are INHARMONIOUS to us for the same reason. Here, you will notice, we have an illustration of the principle of"attunement" which, as we have informed you, is operative on the planeof thought and mental vibrations as well as on that of wirelesstelegraphy. Just as it is a psychological fact that we tend to see andto hear those things which are in harmony with our beliefs and opinions, and our interest, so is it a metaphysical fact that we tend to acceptand absorb the mental vibrations which are in harmony with our opinions, beliefs, and interest, and to reject those which are opposed thereto. 

Moreover, the person who acquaints himself with the law of mentalvibrations and thought-transference acquires a practical knowledge whichenables him to render himself immune to objectionable and undesirablemental currents or thought-waves. We are not necessarily open to theinfluence of every stray current of thought or feeling that happens tobe in our immediate vicinity. Instead, by the proper methods, consciously or unconsciously practiced and manifested, we may, and oftendo, insulate ourselves so that these undesirable mental influences failutterly to affect us; and, likewise, we may actually attract toourselves the desirable mental currents. These principles and methodswill be given later in this part of this book; they are mentioned heremerely to acquaint you with the fact that they are existent and known tothose familiar with this subject. 

Voluntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations. 

Under the head of Voluntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations may beplaced the following two general classes of phenomena, viz. , (1)Voluntary Efforts to Exert Mental Influence upon Others; and (2)Voluntary Efforts to Produce the Phenomena of Telepathy, alongScientific Lines. Each of these general classes of phenomena will now bepresented for your inspection and consideration. 

Voluntary Mental Influence. 

Under the category of Voluntary Mental Influence we find much of thephenomena formerly classed as "Magic"--and by this we mean both WhiteMagic, or efforts to produce results beneficial to the personinfluenced, and Black Magic, or efforts to produce results beneficial tothe person exerting the influence, and often to the positive detrimentof the person influenced. 

WHITE MAGIC. Under the category of White Magic may be placed all thoseefforts of mental healing, and similar phases of metaphysicaltherapeutics; and the accompanying efforts directed toward the generalhappiness and welfare of the person "treated. " The word "treatment" hassprung into use in this connection, in America and Europe, by reason ofits employment by the numerous metaphysical cults and schoolsflourishing there. We hear on all hands of persons being "treated" forHealth, Happiness, and Prosperity in this way. While in some cases, the"magic" is worked on higher planes than those of thought-vibrations, itis nevertheless true that in most instances the entire process is thatof mental induction, along the lines described in the preceding pagesof this book. In such cases the person influenced opens himself to thehelpful thought of the person "treating" him, and thus a co-operationand mental "team work" is secured, often with the most beneficialresults. This phase of the subject is too well known to require lengthyconsideration in this book, and is more properly the subject of the manybooks devoted to this special phase of mental power. 

 * * * * *

BLACK MAGIC. It has well been said that there are always two poles toeverything in Nature, and continued experience and investigation seemsto substantiate this statement. Whenever we find a force or powerproducing beneficial results, we may usually feel assured that the sameforce or power, turned in another direction, or possibly reversed in itsaction, will produce results of an opposite character. And so it is withthis subject of "Magic" which we are now considering. While we would bevery glad to pass over this phase of the subject, truth and duty to ourreaders compel us to state that White Magic has its opposite pole--thatopposite pole known as Black Magic, or the use of psychic force forselfish and unworthy ends. There is no use trying to pursue the ostrichpolicy regarding these things--it is always better to face them boldly, and then to take means to avoid the evil contained in them. 

 * * * * *

We prefer to quote from other writers on this subject, who have giventhis particular matter the most careful attention and investigation, andwho have set forth simply and plainly the result of their investigationsand discoveries. Here follow several quotations from authorities of thiskind:

Base Use of Mind Power

One writer says: "It is a fact known to all students of occultism thatBlack Magic has been frequently employed in all times to further theselfish, base ends of some people. And it is also known to advancedthinkers today that even in this enlightened age there are many who donot scruple to stoop to the use of this hateful practice in order toserve their own ends, notwithstanding the punishment that all trueoccultists know awaits such persons. The annals of history are full ofrecords of various forms of witchcraft, conjuration, and similar formsof Black Magic. All the much talked of practice of 'putting spells' uponpeople are really forms of Black Magic, heightened by the fear andsuperstition of those affected. One has but to read the history ofwitchcraft to see that there was undoubtedly some force at work behindall of the appalling superstitions and ignorance shown by the people ofthose times. What they attributed to the influence of people 'in leaguewith the devil' really arose from the use of Black Magic, or an unworthyuse of Mental Influence, the two things being one at the last. 

The Secret of Witchcraft

"An examination of the methods employed by these 'witches, ' as shown bytheir confessions, give us a key to the mystery. These 'witches' wouldfix their minds upon other people, or their animals, and by holding aconcentrated mental picture there, would send forth thought-wavesaffecting the welfare of the persons being 'adversely treated, ' whichwould influence and disturb them, and often bring on sicknesses. Ofcourse, the effect of those 'treatments' were greatly heightened by theextreme fear and superstition held by the masses of people at the time, for fear is ever a weakening factor in mental influence, and thesuperstitions and credulity of the people caused their minds to vibratein such a manner as to render them extremely passive to the adverseinfluences being directed against them. It is well known that theVoodoos of Africa, and similar cults among other savage races, practiceBlack Magic among their people with great effect. Among the native ofHawaii there are certain men known as 'Kahunas' who pray people sick, orwell, whichever way they are paid to do. These instances could bemultiplied almost indefinitely, but the basic principle is ever the samein such cases. 

Modern Black Magic. 

"In our own civilized lands there are many people who have learned theprinciples of mental influence, and who are using the same for unworthypurposes, seeking to injure others and to defeat their undertakings, orelse trying to bring them around to their own (the treators') point ofview and inclinations. The modern revival of occult knowledge hasoperated along two lines, and in opposite directions. On the one hand, we see and hear of the mighty power for good that mental influence isexerting over the race today, raising up the sick, strengthening theweak, putting courage into the despondent, and transforming failuresinto successes. But, on the other hand, the hateful selfishness andgreed of unprincipled persons is taking advantage of this mighty forceof nature, and prostituting it to the hateful ends of such persons, without heed to the dictates of conscience or the teaching of religionor of ordinary morality. These people are sowing a baleful wind, whichwill result in their reaping a frightful whirlwind on the mental plane. They are bringing down upon themselves pain and misery in the future. "

The Explanation of Sorcery. 

Another writer says: "In various stages of history we find the recordsof persons having been affected by the influences of witches, sorcerers, and other evil-minded, unprincipled persons. In most cases theseso-called witches and sorcerers themselves were under the delusion thatthey were being assisted by the devil or some other supernatural being. They did not realize that they were simply using natural forces. Studying the history of witchcraft, sorcery, black magic, and the like, you will find that the devotees thereof usually employed somepsychometric method. In other cases they would mould little figures ofclay, or of wax, in the general shape and appearance of the person whomthey wished to affect. It was thought that these little figures wereendowed with some supernatural powers or attributes, but of course thiswas mere superstition. The whole power of the little figures arose fromthe fact that they aided the imagination of the spell-worker in forminga mental image of the person sought to be influenced; and thusestablished a strong mental rapport condition. Added to this, you mustremember that the fear and belief of the public greatly aided thespell-worker, and increased his power and influence over these poorpersons. "

The Power of Fearthought. 

The last-named writer explains the reference to "fear and belief" in thelast sentence above quoted by the following very important statements, and these we ask every student of this book to firmly impress upon hismind, for a mighty truth is therein conveyed. The statements in questionare as follows:

"Your attention is hereby called to a very important psychic principleinvolved in the manifestation of that class of phenomena in which isembraced the cases of witchcraft, sorcery, etc. , with which the pages ofhistory are filled. It is a well established fact that by denying thepsychic power over you exerted by any person whatsoever, you practicallyneutralize the psychic power of such person, at least so far as itseffect upon and power over yourself is concerned. The stronger and morepositive is your mental attitude of immunity to such power, and yourassertion and affirmation of that immunity, the greater is your ownpower of psychic resistance, and the less does his possible power overyou become. The average person, not knowing this, is more or lesspassive to psychic influences of other persons, and may be affected bythem to a greater or less extent, the degree depending upon the psychicdevelopment of the person seeking to influence him. 

The Negative Pole. 

"At the extreme negative pole of susceptibility we find persons whobelieve firmly that other persons have psychic power over them, and whoare consequently more or less afraid of such persons and of theirinfluence. This belief and fear operates in the direction of making suchpersons peculiarly sensitive and impressionable to such influence, andthus easily affected by psychic induction. This is the reason that theso-called witches and sorcerers and others of evil repute have beenoften able to acquire such a power over their victims, and to cause themso much trouble. The secret is that THE VICTIMS BELIEVED IN THE POWER OFTHE OTHER PERSONS, AND FEARED THEIR POWER. The greater the belief in, and fear of, the power of the other persons, the greater thesusceptibility to their influence; the greater the disbelief in suchpower, and the firm belief in one's own power of immunity and that ofneutralizing the effect of the psychic influence of other persons, theless is one's degree of susceptibility, and the greater is one's degreeof immunity and power. This is the rule in the case--keep it in mind!

Voodooism Explained. 

"Among the negroes of the South, in America, and among the Hawaiians, wefind marked instances of this kind. The negro Voodoo men and women workBlack Magic on those of their race who are superstitious and credulous, and who have a mortal fear of the Voodoo. Travelers who have visited thecountries in which there is a large negro population have manyinteresting tales to recite of the terrible workings of these Voodooblack magicians. In some cases, sickness and even death is the result. But, mark you this! It is only those who believe in, and fear, the powerof the Voodoos that are so affected. In Hawaii, the Kahunas or nativemagicians are renowned for their power to cause sickness and death tothose who have offended them; or to those who have offended some clientof the Kahuna, and who have hired the latter to 'pray' the enemy tosickness or death. The poor, ignorant Hawaiians, believing implicitly inthe power of the Kahunas, and being in deadly fear of them, are verysusceptible to their psychic influence, and naturally fall easy victimsto their vile arts, unless they buy off the Kahuna, or make peace withhis client. White persons living in Hawaii are not affected by theKahunas, for they do not believe in them, neither do they fear them. Unconsciously, but yet strongly, they 'deny' the power, and are immune. So you see the principle working out here, too. Once you have themaster-key, you may unlock many doors of mystery which have heretoforebeen closed to you. "

Self-Protection. 

The following quotations from writers on this special subject containdetailed directions for the use of those who may have reason to believethat some other person or persons are trying to use psychic force, ormental currents, upon them for selfish purposes, or otherwise. Of coursethe general mental attitude of disbelief, and assertion of one's oneimmunity is sufficient for the purposes of general psychic protection;but we have thought it proper to include the following specialdirections given by those who have made a close study of this subject. 

One writer says: "When you come in contact with people who are seekingto influence you by psychic methods, either direct or indirect, you willfind yourself able to defy their mental attacks by simply rememberingthe strength immanent in your Ego, or Spirit, aided by the statement oraffirmation (made silently to yourself) 'I am an Immortal Spirit, usingthe power of my Ego, which renders me immune from all base psychicattacks or power. ' With this mental attitude you may make powerful eventhe slightest mental effort in the direction of sending forth your ownmental vibrations, and these will scatter the adverse influences in alldirections; it will often be found that the other person will show signsof confusion in such a case, and will seek to get away from yourpresence. With this consciousness held in mind, your mental command toanother, 'Let me alone--I cast off your influence by the power of mySpirit, ' will operate so strongly that you will often actually see theeffect at once. If the other person be stubborn, and determined toinfluence you by words of suggestion, coaxing, threatening, or similarmethods, look him or her straight in the eye, saying mentally: 'I defyyou--my inner power casts off your influence. ' Try this the next timethat any one attempts to influence you either verbally or by means ofthought-waves, and see how strong and positive you will feel, and howthe efforts of the other person will fail. This sounds simple, but thelittle secret is worth thousands of dollars to every individual who willput it into practice. "

Repelling Adverse Influences. 

This writer continues: "Not only in the case of personal influence inthe actual presence of the other person may be defeated in this way, butthe same method will act equally well in the matter of repelling themental influence of others directed against you in the form of 'absenttreatments, ' etc. If you feel yourself inclining toward doing somethingwhich in your heart you feel is not to your best interests, judged froma true viewpoint, you may know that, consciously or unconsciously, someone is seeking in influence you in this way. Then smile to yourself, and make the statements mentioned above, or some similar one, andholding the power of the Spirit within your soul, send forth a mentalcommand just as you would in case the person were actually before you inperson. You may also deny out of existence the influencing power, byasserting mentally: 'I DENY your power to influence me; you have no suchpower over me; I am resting securely upon the Spirit within me; I denyout of existence any power over me asserted by you. ' After repellingthese absent influences you will at once experience a feeling of reliefand strength, and will be able to smile at the thought of any suchadverse influence affecting you in the slightest. "

Neutralizing Psychic Influences. 

Another writer gives us the following most interesting information andadvice for use in cases of this kind: "I wish to point out to you ameans of protection against the use of psychic influence againstyourself on the part of unscrupulous persons, or any other personswhomsoever, for that matter. One is fully justified in employing thismethod of protection against even the meddling influence of otherpersons, who are trying to influence you without your permission orconsent. The following is the method of self-protection or defenseagainst this class of psychic influence: In the first place, you must, of course, refuse to admit to your mind any feeling of fear regardingthe influence of other persons, for such fear opens the door to theirinfluence, as all students of this subject know. If you have been, orare fearful of the psychic influence of any person, you must get to workand drive out that feeling by positive and vigorous denials. The DENIAL, as all students know, is the positive neutralizer of the psychicinfluence of another person, providing you make it in full belief in itstruth. You must take the mental position (which is really the true one)that you are absolutely immune to the psychic attack or influence. Youshould say, mentally, 'deny to any person the power to influence mepsychically without my consent; I am positive to all such influences, and they are negative to me; I neutralize all such influences by thispositive denial!' It should encourage you to know that it requires farless force and power to repel and neutralize psychic influences of thiskind, than is required to send forth the power; an ounce of denial andprotection overcomes a pound of psychic attacking power. Nature givesyou the means of protection, and gives you the 'best end of the stick';and it is your own fault if you do not use it effectively. A word to thewise is sufficient. "

Telepathic Phenomena. 

The second general class of phenomena in the general category ofVoluntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations is that known as "TelepathicPhenomena. " In a sense, of course, all phases of Thought Transmission, and particularly that of Voluntary Thought Transmission, may beconsidered as forms of Telepathy; but for the purpose of classificationand distinction we have in this book classed as Telepathic Phenomenamerely those forms and phases of Thought Transference in which there isan agreement between the telepathic sender and the telepathic receiver, and in which the experiments are conducted more or less along the linesof scientific investigation. 

Scientific Investigators. 

Scientific observers, for a number of years past, have been conductingcareful series of experiments in Telepathy, and many volumes of thereports of such investigations have been published by various psychicresearch societies. Among the eminent scientists who have devoted muchattention to this subject are the following: Professor Henry Sidgewick, of Cambridge University; Professor Balfour Stewart, of the Royal Societyof England; Rt. Hon. A. J. Balfour, the eminent English statesman andscientist; Professor William James, the eminent American psychologist;Sir William Crookes, the great English chemist, physicist, who inventedthe celebrated "Crookes' Tubes, " without which the discovery of theX-Rays, Radio Activity, etc. , would have been impossible; Frederick W. H. Myers, the celebrated investigator of Psychic Phenomena; and SirOliver Lodge, the eminent English scientist. All these men are of thehighest international standing and reputation, and their acceptance ofthe phenomena of Telepathy places the same on a firm scientific basis. 

How Experiments Are Conducted. 

The scientific experiments involving Telepathy, which have beenconducted by numerous societies for psychical research and other bodies, have ranged from quite simple tests to those very complex. In all ofthese experiments there has been one person called the "sender, " andanother called the "receiver"--or names corresponding to these. Thesender fixes in his mind a strong impression of the name or picture tobe transmitted, and then makes a positive effort of the will to transmitthe same to the receiver. The receiver assumes a passive receptivemental attitude, and then reports the word or image that comes into hismind. The more complex tests embody these same simple features. 

Some of the early reports of the Society for Psychical Research, ofLondon, England, show results most amazing to those who have not made apersonal investigation of these matters. In some of the tests, thereceiver correctly reported seventeen cards in succession, the saidcards having been shown the sender, but kept out of sight of thereceiver, and no possible communication between the two being allowed. In tests of naming small objects held by the sender, the receivercorrectly named five out of six. In one complicated test, in whichvarious objects, names, etc. , were transmitted, the report shows asuccessful report of 202 out of a possible 382. Such results, of course, took the results entirely out of the operation of the law of averages. Other successful experiments showed a high percentage of resultsobtained from the reproduction by the sender of geometrical and otherfigures and designs exhibited to the sender. 

Private Experiments. 

But, after all, the most convincing evidences of Telepathy are thosewhich most of us have met with in our own experience. There are but fewintelligent, observing persons who have not, at some time in their life, had experiences of this kind, in which the thoughts of others wereperceived plainly by themselves. Many persons have established such aclose rapport condition between themselves and friends or relatives thatinstances of remarkable thought-transmission between them are quitecommon and ordinary. 

Development of Telepathic Power. 

Practically every person may develop a certain degree of telepathicpower, sending, receiving, or both, by means of a moderate amount ofregular and earnest practice and experiments. In developing sendingpower, the person should cultivate concentration, and the use of thewill in the direction of projecting mental states; in the case of thedesired development of the receiving power, the person should developreceptiveness and passivity, and a certain recognition of an actualtelepathic impulse which is impossible to describe in words but whichcomes to every investigator, and which when once experienced is alwaysrecognized thereafter. 

"Mind Reading. "

Perhaps the best plan for the beginner is to practice the popular "mindreading" experiment or game, which is quite popular in some localities, and among persons interested in this line of thought. The experiments ofthis kind are performed, generally, about as follows: The receiverleaves the room, and during his or her absence the company in the roomselect some object, large or small, such as a chair or a small penknife, etc. , and the same is shown and named to the sender. Then the receiveris called back into the room for the experiment, and is blindfoldedsecurely. Then the receiver takes the right hand of the sender andplaces it in his (the receiver's) left hand, holding it firmly there. The sender then concentrates his mind upon the object to be "found, " andmentally wills that the receiver move toward it. The receiver thenexperiences a peculiar faint impulse in the direction of the object, andaccordingly moves toward it. After considerable practice, the receiveracquires the faculty of not only finding large objects, but also is ableto locate small objects, such as concealed rings, pins, etc. 

Development Practices. 

This class of experiments, while open to the objection that there may bemore or less muscular direction consciously or unconsciously given bythe sender, nevertheless tend to develop proficiency in both sender andreceiver. In fact, such experiments are perhaps one of the very bestmethods of developing projecting or receiving power along the lines ofoccult or psychic forces. This because the persons become familiar withthe psychic processes involved, and their efficiency becomes increasedby practice and experiment. This plan is like that of teaching a childhow to walk by means of holding its hand, allowing it to rest on chairs, etc. In practicing such experiments, the receiver will soon becomeconscious of receiving the thought message in what may be called a"wireless flash, " instead of by the slower, and less clear process oftransmission through the physical body of the sender, and thence throughhis own nerves. When the sender begins to experience these flashes ofconsciousness, he is ready to proceed to the next stage. 

The "Willing Game. "

The second stage on telepathic development is much akin to that justdescribed, with the difference that there is no physical contact betweenthe sender and the receiver--no holding of hands, etc. A variation ofthis is found in the familiar "willing game" in which the whole roomfulof persons concentrates upon the receiver, and "wills" that he find aselected object. On the whole, however, the private experimentsconducted by the sender and the receiver, with perhaps a few intelligentand sympathetic spectators, are far better than the "willing game" plan, in which there are usually many triflers present ready to make a joke ofthe whole thing, and thus taking away that true concentration underwhich the best results may be obtained. 

Formal Tests. 

The third step in telepathic development is that of conductingexperiments similar to those originally conducted by the Society forPsychical Research, previously mentioned. That is to say, the sender mayselect cards from a pack, coins from a pile, small objects from acollection, etc. , and then endeavor to transmit the impression of thesame to the receiver--the latter then reporting his flashes ofimpression received. This may be rendered more complicated by having thesender in one place, and the receiver at another, the time havingpreviously been agreed upon between them. In experiments conducted atlong range, it has been generally found better for the receiver to writedown the word, thought, or mental, picture which has been transmitted tohim by the sender; and for the sender to write down the name or pictureof the thing the idea of which he has transmitted. These memoranda servenot only as scientific proof of the experiment, but also serve as abarometer of progress being made during the experiments. 

Automatic Writing. 

In this connection it may be stated that many investigators andexperimentors along the lines of telepathic phenomena have met withconsiderable success in the direction of Automatic Writing from livingpersons, which of course is merely a special form of Telepathy. In somecases the communications received in this way were at first thought tobe from disembodied entities, until later it was discovered that thethoughts were actually transmitted (in some cases unintentionally) byliving persons. The late W. T. Stead, the London editor and famousinvestigator of psychic phenomena, who was lost on the "Titanic" severalyears ago, was remarkably successful along this special line oftelepathic transmission, he being one of the most efficient receivers ofthis kind of which those familiar with the subject have any knowledge. His written records of these experiments are very interesting, and forma valuable contribution to this subject. In this class of experiments, the sender concentrates fixedly upon the thought--word for word--andwills that the recipient write down the word so transmitted; thereceiver sit passively at the time agreed upon, and allows his arm andhand to be moved by means of the psychic currents beating upon him, andwhich are then unconsciously transformed into muscular action--theprocess being similar to that of ordinary writing, except that insteadof the activity of the brain of the writer being behind the muscularmotion, that of the sender performs that task. 

Psychic Sensitiveness. 

The student of this book will find in the succeeding portions thereof, from time to time, certain general instructions regarding thecultivation of psychic receptivity and sensitiveness. These generalinstructions are also applicable to the cultivation of telepathic power, and may be properly applied to that end. There is really but one generalprinciple involved in all the many forms of psychic receptivity, namelythat of (1) shutting the senses to the ordinary impressions of theoutside world, and (2) opening the higher channels of sense to theimpressions coming in the form of vibrations of the higher forces andfiner powers of Nature. At the last, it is simply a matter of "gettingin tune, " just as truly as in the case of the wireless telegraphy. Thesethings are difficult to explain in ordinary words to one who has had noexperience along these lines; but when one begins to actually experimentand practice, the way opens out gradually and steadily, and then theperson can grasp the meaning of the little "hints" dropped by others whohave traveled the same path. So, after all, it comes down to the matterof Practice, Experiment, and Learning by Trying!

PART IV

CLAIRVOYANCE AND KINDRED PHENOMENA

A very large and very interesting class of occult or psychic phenomenais that known under the very general classification of "Clairvoyance, "which term we have thought it advisable to employ in this sense in thisbook, notwithstanding the technical objections urged by some againstsuch a general usage. The term "Clairvoyance" really means "clearseeing, " or "clear sight, " but its special meaning, established by longusage, is "A power of discerning objects not perceptible to the normalsenses. " When it comes to the technical use of the term by students andteachers of psychic research and occultism, however, there is found aconfused meaning of the term, some employing it in one sense, and othersin another one. Accordingly, it is perhaps as well to explain theparticular usage adopted and followed in this book. 

Clairvoyance Defined. 

The English Society for Psychical Research, in its glossary, defines theterm as follows: "The faculty or act of perceiving, as though visually, with some coincidental truth, some distant scene; it is used sometimes, but hardly properly, for transcendental vision, or the perception ofbeings regarded as on another plane of existence. " A distinguishedinvestigator along psychic lines, in one of her reports to the EnglishSociety for Psychical Research, has given the following definition ofthis term as employed by her in her reports, viz. , "The word'clairvoyant' is often used very loosely, and with widely differentmeanings. I denote by it a faculty of acquiring supernormally, BUT NOTBY READING THE MINDS OF PERSONS PRESENT, a knowledge of facts such as wenormally acquire by the use of our senses. I do not limit it toknowledge that would normally be acquired by the sense of sight, nor doI limit it to a knowledge of present facts. A similar knowledge of thepast, and if necessary, of future events, may be included. On the otherhand, I exclude the mere faculty of seeing apparitions, which issometimes called clairvoyance. "

The last stated definition agrees almost perfectly with the views of thewriter of the present book, and the term "Clairvoyance" is used here inthe particular sense indicated by such definition. The student of thisbook, therefore, is asked to distinguish Clairvoyance, on the one hand, from the phenomena of Telepathy or Thought Transference, and, on theother hand, from the phenomena of communication with entities on otherplanes of existence, including the perception of apparitions. 

The Phenomena of Clairvoyance. 

The phenomena of Clairvoyance may be subdivided (a) according to methodsemployed, and also (b) according to general distinctions. The saidclassifications follow:

CLASSIFICATION ACCORDING TO METHODS. The classification of ClairvoyantPhenomena according to methods employed, proceeds as follows: (1)PSYCHOMETRY, in which the clairvoyant becomes en rapport through themedium of some physical object connected with the person or scene whichis the object of the en rapport connection; (2) CRYSTAL GAZING, etc. , inwhich the en rapport connection is established by means of a crystal, magic mirror, etc. , into which the clairvoyant gazes; (3) DIRECTCLAIRVOYANCE, in which the clairvoyant directly establishes the enrapport connection by means of raising his or her psychic vibrations soas to become "in tune" with the finer vibrations of Nature, without theaid of physical objects. 

Classification According to General Distinctions. 

The classification of Clairvoyant Phenomena according to generaldistinctions, proceeds as follows: (1) PRESENT CLAIRVOYANCE, in whichthe objects perceived by the clairvoyant are present in Space and Time, although invisible to normal sight; (2) SPACE CLAIRVOYANCE, in which theclairvoyant vision includes objects and scenes removed in space from theimmediate normal perception of the clairvoyant; (3) TIME CLAIRVOYANCE, in which the clairvoyant perceives objects or scenes removed from him inpast time, or future time. 

In order that the student may obtain a comprehensive understanding ofthe phenomena of Clairvoyance, we have thought it well to give you abrief, general outline of the particular phenomena fitting into theseseveral classes, and to give you, also, a general idea of the principalmethods employed to obtain the phenomenal manifestations in question. We begin by calling your attention to the three general classes ofmethod employed to obtain the manifestation of clairvoyant phenomena, namely: Psychometry, Crystal Gazing, and Clairvoyant Psychic States, respectively. 

Psychometry. 

In Psychometry, the clairvoyant establishes the en rapport connectionwith objects, persons or scenes, removed in space or in time, by meansof some physical object associated with the distant object, person orscene; for instance, the physical objects may be a piece of clothing, abit of stone, a coin, a bit of jewelry, etc. , which has been closelyassociated with that which the clairvoyant desires to sense psychically. The distinctive feature of this class of clairvoyant phenomena is thisCONNECTING LINK of physical objects. A writer has cleverly compared thisconnecting link with the bit of clothing which the keen-scentedbloodhound is given to sniff in order that he may then discover by scentthe person sought, the latter having previously worn the bit of clothingpresented to the dog's sense of smell. 

The "Psychic Scent. "

Occultists have elaborated a technical theory to account for thephenomena of Psychometry, or rather to account for the action of the"connecting link" of the physical object employed to establish theconnection between clairvoyant and distant object, person, or scene. Butwe do not think it advisable to enter into a discussion of theseelaborate, technical theories, which are apt to confuse the beginner, and to distract his attention from the important facts of the case. Wethink it is sufficient to say that the "connecting link, " or physicalobject, seems to carry along with it, in its inner substance or nature, the vibrations of its past environment; and that the clairvoyant, cominginto receptive contact with such vibrations, is enabled with comparativeease to follow up the psychic "scent" until he establishes clairvoyanten rapport connection with the distant object, person, or sceneassociated with the physical object. When it is remembered that thephysical "scent" of anything is merely a matter of the detection ofcertain vibrations, the illustration is seen to be not so very far outof the way after all. 

Magnetic Affinity. 

A somewhat celebrated investigator of psychic and occult phenomena hassaid concerning this phases of Clairvoyance: "The untrained clairvoyantusually cannot find any particular astral picture when it is wanted, without some special link to put him en rapport with the subjectrequired. Psychometry is an instance in point. It seems as though therewere a sort of magnetic attachment or affinity between any particle ofmatter and the record which contains its history--an affinity whichenables it to act as a kind of conductor between that record and thefaculties of anyone who can read it. For instance, I once brought fromStonehenge a tiny fragment of stone, not larger than a pin's head, andon putting this into an envelope and handing it to a psychometrist whohad no idea what it was, she at once began to describe that wonderfulruin and the desolate country surrounding it, and then went on topicture vividly what were evidently scenes from its early history, showing that the infinitesimal fragment had been sufficient to put herinto communication with the records connected with the spot from whichit came. The scenes through which we pass in the course of our life seemto act in the same way upon the cells of our brain as did the history ofStonehenge upon that particle of stone. They establish a connection withthose cells by means of which our mind is put en rapport with thatparticular portion of the records, and so we 'remember' what we haveseen. "

Distant En Rapport. 

One of the most familiar instances of the production of clairvoyantphenomena by means of Psychometry is that illustrated in the abovequotation, namely the production of the en rapport relation with distantscenes by means of the connecting link of some small object which had atsome time in the past been located at that point. In such cases thepsychometrist usually presses the small object up to his or her head, and then induces a passive, receptive psychical condition; then, sooneror later, the clairvoyant experiences a "sensation, " or a "dreampicture" of the scene in question. Often, once the picture of the sceneis obtained, the clairvoyant may manifest more marked past-timeclairvoyance, in the direction of running back over the history of thescene itself. The instance related in the above quotation is a case ofthis kind. Similar cases are frequently met with by the investigatoralong these lines, in which the clairvoyant is able to give the historyof certain places in ancient Egypt, from the connecting link of a pieceof mummy-cloth; or else to give a picture of certain events inantediluvian times, from the connecting link of a bit of fossilsubstance. The history of Psychometry is filled with remarkableinstances of this kind. Bullets gathered from battlefields also servevery effectively as such psychometric connecting links. Old furniture, old pictures, and old jewelry also are common objects serving to producewonderful phenomena of this kind. In fact, any physical object havingpast-time or far-distant space connections may be employed effectivelyin such experiments. 

Psychic Underground Exploration. 

Psychometry is frequently employed to describe underground or "mine"conditions existing at the present time at the particular place fromwhich a particular piece of ore or mineral has been taken, which ore ormineral has been handed the psychometrist to be used as the connectinglink. As many practical miners know from actual experience, manyvaluable coal, zinc, lead, silver and gold mines have been successfullylocated in this way. In such cases the psychometrist has been able tofollow up the psychic "scent" given by the piece of mineral, and thus todescribe the strata or veins of the mineral lying underground andunopened by the pick or drill. 

Psychic Detective Work. 

Many cases are recorded by the investigators in which the psychometristis able to "sense" a particular locality, a house, a room, a place ofbusiness, for instance, by means of the connecting link afforded by somephysical object formerly associated with the said location. Some writershave called this class of psychometric phenomena "psychic spying" or"psychic detective work. " One writer records a case in which he gave toa young psychometrist a penholder from the office of a lawyer, thelatter being located about eight hundred miles away; the psychometristthen gave a perfect picture of the interior of the far-distant lawyer'soffice, the scene across the street visible from the office window, andcertain events which were happening in the office and on the street atthat particular time--all of which report was verified in detail bysubsequent careful inquiry. 

How to Psychometrize. 

The following general remarks concerning Psychometry, given by a writeron the subject, will be found interesting and instructive. The writersays: "There are no special directions to be given the student inpsychometry. All that can be done is to suggest that each person shouldtry the experiments for himself, in order to find out whether he has, orhas not the psychometric power in some degree of development. He may beable to develop his psychometric powers by the general methods given forpsychic development; but, in any event, he will find that actualpractice and experiment will do much for him in the direction ofexperiment. Let the student take strange objects, and, sitting in aquiet room with the object held to his forehead, endeavor to shut outall thoughts coming from the outside world, and forget all his personalaffairs. In a short time, if the conditions be right, he will begin tohave flashes of scenes associated with the history of the object inquestion. At first these impressions may be somewhat disconnected andmore or less confused, but before long there will be noticed a clearingaway of the scene, and the mental picture will become quite plain. Practice will develop the power. The student should practice only whenalone or when in the presence of some sympathetic friend or friends. Heshould always avoid discordant and inharmonious company while practicinghis psychic power. Many of the best psychometrists keep their physicaleyes closed when practicing this power, thus allowing the inner sensesto function without distraction from the outer senses. 

Developing Psychometry. 

"You have doubtless heard of the sensing of sealed letters spoken of aspure clairvoyance. But this phase of phenomena properly belongs to therealm of Psychometry. Letters frequently prove to be very excellentconnecting links in psychometric experiments. I advise the student tobegin with old letters. He will be surprised to discover how readily hewill begin to receive psychic impressions from the letters--either fromthe person who wrote them, or from the place in which they were written, or from some one connected with their subsequent history. One of themost interesting experiments I ever witnessed in Psychometry was that inwhich a letter that had been forwarded from place to place, until it hadgone completely around the globe, was psychometrized by a young Hindumaid. Although ignorant of the outside world of foreign lands, the youngwomen was able to picture the people and scenery of every part of theglobe in which the letter had traveled. Her report was really aninteresting 'travelogue' of a trip around the world, given in tabloidform. The student may obtain some interesting results inpsychometrizing old letters--but let him always be conscientious aboutit, and be careful to refrain from divulging the secrets that willbecome his during the course of these experiments. Let him be honorableon the psychic plane as well as on the physical plane--more so, ratherthan less so, in fact. "

Varieties of Psychometry. 

Another investigator along these lines gives the following instructivecomments regarding the practice of psychometric power: "Persons of ahighly-strung nervous organization, with large perceptive faculties makethe best psychometrists. Phlegmatic people seldom psychometrize clearly, and usually lack receptivity to the finer forces. Letters, clothes, hair, coins, ornaments, or jewels--in fact, almost any article which hasbelonged to, or has been worn by, its possessor for any length of time, will suffice to enable the psychometrist to relate himself to, andglimpse impressions of, the personal sphere of that individual. Somepsychometrists succeed better with certain kinds of objects than withothers. Metals and minerals are not good 'conductors'--if we may usethat term--to some operators; while they are very satisfactory toothers. In the same way, some psychometrists are very good characterreaders, others are very successful in the diagnosis of diseases; somecan read the book of Nature, while to others it is a sealed book, ornearly so, but they are able to gauge the mental qualifications of theirvisitors, while others realize their moral and spiritual states. Again, some read the Past, and enter into the Present states or condition oftheir clients, while others are successful in exercising propheticalprevision. These differences may be modified, and the boundaries of theperceptive power may be extended by self-study, experiment, and culture;but every psychic has his qualifications and his limitations; one willsucceed where another may fail; hence it is well and wise for each oneto discover what he can do best, what sphere he can best occupy, andthen endeavor to fill it. 

Psychometric "Getting in Touch. "

"A psychometrist may, by holding a letter in his hand, or putting it tohis forehead, be able to perceive and delineate the personal appearanceof the writer thereof, and, in a way, to 'take on' his conditions, describe his feelings and thoughts to such an extent as to identifyhimself with him and to feel, for the time being, as if he, himself, were the writer; he may even tell what is written in the letter, although unable to see the writing. Human hair is found by somepsychometrists to give them the best means of coming into touch withtheir subjects, and it is said that such hair should be cut from thehead just behind the ears, as close to the scalp as possible. It notinfrequently happens that a psychometrist gets started upon a falsetrail, so to speak, and especially so when the inquirer is suspicious, or where there is a mixture of psychic influences. A fan passed by alady to a sitter in the front row at a meeting, and held in the hands ofthe latter for a few minutes while awaiting a chance to be handed to thepsychic, has resulted in a blending of vibratory influences which hascaused an imperfect or confused 'reading. ' In one case the gentleman whoheld the fan said 'I fully recognize the part of the description whichthe lady does not admit--it applies to myself quite perfectly. ' Hencethe necessity for care in providing articles for psychometrists in apublic meeting. A ring, for instance, which has been in the family forgenerations, and handed from one wearer to another in the course ofyears, may afford such a blending of psychic vibrations that thepsychometrist may be unable to sense distinctly each distinct stratum ofinfluence therein. 

Psychometric Readings. 

"The person who sits for the psychometrist for a 'reading' should not beantagonistic nor frivolous, neither should he desire specialinformation, nor concentrate his thought forces upon any given point, asotherwise he may dominate the psychic and thus mislead him intoperceiving only a reflex of his own hopes or fears. He will do well topreserve an open mind, and an impartial though sympathetic mentalattitude, and then await results. It is unwise to interrupt, explain, orquestion during the time that a delineation is being given, for by sodoing the psychic sphere is disturbed and the thought projections causedto act like the breezes upon the surface of a lake, producing confusedand distorted appearances. It is best to allow the descriptions to begiven in its entirety before asking questions regarding any of itsdetails; it is quite possible or probable that the very points uponwhich inquiries seem necessary will be more fully elucidated before theclose of the reading. If a special reading, and not a general one isrequired--say, for instance, a diagnosis of diseased conditions--a hintof what is desired at the outset should be sufficient. "

Crystal Gazing, Etc. 

The second of the three general classes of the methods employed toobtain the manifestation of clairvoyant phenomena is that known asCrystal Gazing. In this class of methods the clairvoyant establishes theen rapport condition by means of a crystal, magic mirror, or similarobject, which serves principally to concentrate the psychic visualpowers to a focus, and thus to enable the psychic to raise his or herpsychic vibrations at that concentrated focused point. 

Crystals and Bright Objects. 

The use of crystals and other bright objects for this purpose has beencommon to occultists and psychics at all times, past and present, and atall places, oriental or occidental. The earlier races employed shiningpieces of quartz or other clear crystal rock for this purpose. Laterpolished metals were used in the same way. The native soothsayers ofbarbaric lands employ clear water, glowing embers, or sparks, for thispurpose. In some places the soothsayers hold drops of blood in thehollow of their hands for divining purposes. Others bore a hole in theground, and fill it with water, and then gaze into it. Some tribes usedark polished stones. A writer on the subject has said: "They stare intoa crystal ball, a cup, a mirror, a blot of ink, a drop of blood, a bowlof water, a pond, water in a glass bowl, or almost any polished surface, etc. " In fact, it may be said that almost every object capable ofpresenting a polished surface has been employed by some race as an aidto psychic vision. In Europe and America, at the present day, quartz orglass crystals are so used; but others obtain quite satisfactoryresults from the use of watch crystals laid over a black cloth, preferably a piece of black velvet cloth. Others use highly polishedbits of silver; while others content themselves with the use of a littlepool of black ink lying on the bottom of a small saucer, while othershave cups painted black on the inside, into which is poured water. 

The Care of the Crystal. 

There is no particular virtue in any particular object used for thispurpose, as such object acts merely to focus the psychic power of theperson, as has been said. Certainly the student should not fall into theerror of supposing that the crystal, or similar object, has anymiraculous or supernatural power whatsoever, it is simply an instrument, like the microscope or telescope, nothing more or less. But, at the sametime, it must be admitted that there is much truth in the claim ofcertain crystal gazers, to the effect that the use of a particularcrystal seems to have the effect of polarizing its molecules so as torender it a more effective instrument in time. In fact, the phenomenonseems to bear a close relation to the well known case of a long-usedviolin becoming a more perfect instrument, and giving forth richer andfuller notes than a new instrument. The longer a gazing crystal is used, especially by the one person, the better does it seem to serve thepurposes of that particular person. Experts in crystal gazing insistthat the crystal gazer should keep his own crystal for his ownparticular use, and not allow it to be used indiscriminately, particularly in the case of strangers or of persons not sympathetic withpsychic subjects. They claim that each crystal becomes polarizedaccording to the individual character and needs of the person habituallyusing it, and that it is unwise to allow others to disturb this qualityin it. 

How to Use the Crystal. 

The best authorities on the subject of crystal-gazing insist that allexperiments along the said lines should be conducted in a serious, earnest manner, and that all frivolity or trifling should be avoided ifthe best results are wished for. This, of course, is true concerning allphases of psychic investigation, as all true students of the subjectknow. All the authorities agree that the crystal gazer should sit withthe light behind his back, and never in front of him. While an earneststeady gaze is desirable, there should be no straining of the eyes. Asone writer has said: "Gaze calmly at the crystal, but do not strain youreyes. Do not try to avoid winking your eyes--there is a differencebetween 'gazing' and 'staring, ' remember. " Some authorities advise thatthe crystal gazer should make funnels of his hands, using them as hewould a pair of opera-glasses. 

The "Milky Mist. "

While some experimenters obtain results almost from the time of thefirst trial, others find that it requires a number of sittings beforethey begin to obtain even faint results. The psychic picture in thecrystal usually begins by the appearance of a cloudy "milky mist, "succeeding the former transparent appearance of the crystal. The milkycloud becomes more dense, and finally there appears in its midst afaint form, outline, face, or scene of some kind. Some have comparedthis gradual emergence of the picture to the gradual development of thepicture of the photographic plate when the latter is subjected to theaction of the developing fluid. 

Classes of Psychic Pictures. 

An English writer on the subject furnishes the following generalclassification of the psychic pictures manifested in the process ofcrystal gazing. The said authority might well have added that each andevery form of clairvoyant picturing is possible in crystal gazing; forcrystal gazing is merely one particular form or method of inducingclairvoyant or psychic vision, and is not a distinct branch of psychicphenomena in itself. The classification of the English authority, however, is as follows:

"1. Images of something unconsciously observed. New reproductions, voluntary or spontaneous, and bringing no fresh knowledge to the mind. 

"2. Images of ideas unconsciously acquired from others. Some memory orimaginative effort which does not come from the gazer's ordinary self. Revivals of memory. Illustrations of thought. 

"3. Images, clairvoyant or prophetic. Pictures giving information as tosomething past, present, or future, which the gazer has no other chanceof knowing. "

General Directions for Crystal Gazing. 

An old English authority on the subject of crystal gazing handed down tohis students a certain set of general directions and rules to govern theconduct of their experiments. These rules and directions have neverbeen improved upon by the later writers on the subject, according to theopinion of the best authorities; and such stand today as perhaps thesimplest and best set of general rules and directions on this importantsubject. For this reason we have thought it advisable to include thesame in this chapter, for the guidance of our own students. Here followthe said general rules and directions:

"What is desired through the regular use of the translucent sphere is tocultivate a personal degree of clairvoyant power, so that visions ofthings or events, past, present, and future, may appear clearly in theinterior vision, or eye of the soul. In the pursuit of this effort only, the crystal becomes at once a beautiful, interesting and harmlesschannel of pleasure and instruction, shorn of dangers, and renderedconducive to mental development. To the attainment of this desirableend, attention is asked to the following practical directions, which, ifcarefully followed, will lead to success:

Selection of Place, Etc. 

"(1) Select a quiet room where you will be entirely undisturbed, takingcare that it is as far as possible free from mirrors, ornaments, pictures, glaring colors, and the like, which may otherwise distract theattention. The room should be of comfortable temperature, in accordancewith the time of year, neither hot nor cold. About 60 to 65 degreesFahr. Is suitable in most cases, though allowance can be made wherenecessary for natural differences in the temperaments of variouspersons. Thus thin, nervous, delicately organized individuals, and thoseof lymphatic and soft, easy-going, passive types, require a slightlywarmer apartment than the more positive class who are known by theirdark eyes, hair and complexion, combined with prominent joints. Should afire, or any form of artificial light be necessary, it should bescreened off, so as to prevent the light rays from being reflected in, or in any other manner directly reaching the crystal. The room shouldnot be dark, but rather shadowed, or charged with a dull light, somewhatsuch as prevails on a cloudy or wet day. 

Adjusting the Crystal. 

"(2) The crystal should be placed on its stand on a table, or it mayrest on a black velvet cushion, but in either case it should bepartially surrounded by a black silk or similar wrap or screen, soadjusted as to cut off any undesirable reflection. Before beginning toexperiment, remember that most frequently nothing will be seen on thefirst occasion, and possibly not for several sittings; though somesitters, if strongly gifted with psychic powers in a state ofunconsciousness, and sometimes conscious degree of unfoldment, may befortunate enough to obtain good results at the first trial. If, therefore, nothing is perceived during the first few attempts, do notdespair or become impatient, or imagine that you will never seeanything. There is a royal road to crystal vision, but it is open onlyto the combined password of Calmness, Patience, and Perseverance. If atthe first attempt to ride a bicycle, failure ensues, the only way tolearn is to pay attention to the necessary rules, and to persevere dailyuntil the ability to ride comes naturally. Thus it is with the would-beseer. Persevere in accordance with these simple directions, and successwill sooner or later crown your efforts. 

Time of Sittings. 

"(3) Commence by sitting comfortably with the eyes fixed upon thecrystal, not by a fixed stare, but with a steady, calm gaze, for tenminutes only, on the first occasion. In taking the time it is best tohang your watch at a distance, where, while the face is clearly visible, the ticking is rendered inaudible. When the time is up, carefully putthe crystal away in its case, and keep it in a dark place, under lockand key, allowing no one but yourself to handle it. At the secondsitting, which should be at the same place, in the same position, and atthe same time, you may increase the length of the effort to fifteenminutes, and continue this period during the next five or six sittings, after which the time may be gradually increased, but should in no caseexceed one hour. The precise order of repetition is always to befollowed until the experimenter has developed an almost automaticability to readily obtain results, when it need no longer be adhered to. 

Other Persons Present. 

"(4) Any person, or persons, admitted to the room, and allowed to remainwhile you sit, should (a) keep absolute silence, and (b) remain seatedat a distance from you. When you have developed your latent powers, questions may, of course, be put to you by one of those present, buteven then in a very gentle, or low and slow tone of voice; neversuddenly, or in a forceful manner. 

Crystalline Vision. 

"(5) When you find the crystals begin to look dull or cloudy, with smallpin-points of light glittering therein, like tiny stars, you may knowthat you are commencing to obtain that for which you seek, viz. , crystalline vision. Therefore, persevere with confidence. This conditionmay, or may not, continue for several sittings, the crystal seeming attimes to alternatively appear and disappear, as in a mist. By and bythis hazy appearance, in its turn, will give way quite suddenly to ablindness of the senses to all else but a blue or bluish ocean of space, against which, as if it were a background, the vision will be clearlyapparent. 

Physical Requirements. 

"(6) The crystal should not be used soon after taking a meal, and careshould be taken in matters of diet to partake only of digestible foods, and to avoid alcoholic beverages. Plain and nourishing food, and outdoorexercise, with contentment of mind, or love of simplicity of living, aregreat aids to success. Mental anxiety, or ill-health, are not conduciveto the desired end. Attention to correct breathing is of importance. 

Determining Time of Fulfillment. 

"(7) As regards the time at which events seen will come to pass, eachseer is usually impressed with regard thereto; but, as a general rule, visions appearing in the extreme background indicate time more remote, either past or future, than those perceived nearer at hand; while thoseappearing in the foreground, or closer to the seer, denote the presentor immediate future. 

Two Classes of Visions. 

"(8) Two principal classes of vision will present themselves to thesitter, viz. : (a) the Symbolic, indicated by the appearance of symbolssuch as a flag, boat, knife, gold, etc. , and (b) Actual Scenes andPersonages, in action or otherwise. Persons of a positive type oforganization, the more active, excitable, yet decided type, are mostlikely to perceive symbolically, or allegorically; while those of apassive nature usually receive direct or literal revelations. Bothclasses will find it necessary to carefully cultivate truthfulness, unselfishness, gratitude for what is shown, and absolute confidence inthe love, wisdom, and guidance of God Himself. "

Time and Space in Crystal Gazing. 

In the subsequent pages the student will perceive the differentmanifestations of clairvoyant vision classified according to thedistinction of Time and Space. Clairvoyant vision may disclose objects, scenes, or persons either near by in space, or far off in space; eitherexisting in present time, in past time, or in future time. Inasmuch asthe visions of crystal gazing are merely particular forms of clairvoyantvision, it follows that all of the several above named distinctive formsof vision are manifested in crystal gazing. The vision shown in thecrystal may be that of something very near in space, or perhaps very faroff in space, or removed in space only a moderate distance. Likewisesuch vision may be based upon things existing at the present time, or atsome period of past time, or at some period of and visions of past, present, or future things, events, persons, scenes--each or all of thesemanifestations are possible to the clairvoyant vision of the crystalgazer, and pictured in the reflecting surface of the crystal or othershining surface employed by him in his experiments. 

Direct Clairvoyance. 

The third of the three general classes of the methods employed to obtainthe manifestation of clairvoyant phenomena is that known as DirectClairvoyance. In this class of methods the clairvoyant directlyestablishes the en rapport connection with the past or present, near ordistant, objects, persons, scenes, or events, by means of raising his orher psychic vibrations so as to become "in tune" with the finervibrations of Nature, without the aid of the physical objects requiredin the methods of Psychometry and Crystal Gazing, respectively. 

Trance Conditions. 

Many clairvoyants, manifesting their powers by means of the methods ofDirect Clairvoyance, produce in themselves the condition of trance, orsemi-trance condition. Many students believe that these conditions areabsolutely necessary for the production of this kind of phenomena, butthey neglect, or are actually unaware of, the fact that many of thehighest forms of this class of clairvoyant phenomena are manifested byclairvoyants who are no more in a trance condition, or that ofsemi-trance, than those following the methods of Psychometry or CrystalGazing, respectively. All that is required is that the clairvoyantmaintain a quiescent mental attitude, shutting out the sounds, sights, and thoughts of the outside world, and concentrating the full attentionupon the clairvoyant work before him or her. Some, it is true, passeasily into the semi-trance, or even the full trance condition, but thelatter are not absolutely necessary states. 

Clairvoyant Reverie. 

A writer on the subject of Clairvoyance says: "The best authoritiesinstruct their pupils that the state of clairvoyant reverie may besafely and effectively induced by the practice of mental concentrationalone. They advise positively against artificial methods. All that isneeded is that the consciousness be focused to a single point--become'one pointed' as the Hindu teachers call it. The intelligent practice ofconcentration accomplishes this without the necessity of any artificialmethods of development, or the production of abnormal psychic states. You easily concentrate your full attention when you witness aninteresting play, or listen to a beautiful rendition of some greatmasterpiece of musical composition, or gaze at some miracle of picturedor sculptured art. In these cases your attention is completely occupiedwith the interesting thing before you, so that you have almostcompletely shut out the outer world of sound, sight, and thought--butyou are, nevertheless, perfectly wide awake and conscious. The samething is true when you read a very interesting book--the world is shutout from your consciousness, and you are oblivious to the sights andsounds around you. We frequently witness the sight of two lovers to whomthe outside world is non-existent for the time being, and to whom thereis nothing in the world except themselves. Again, persons often fallinto a 'brown study, ' or 'day dream, ' in which all consciousness of theoutside world seems to be shut out, yet the person is fully consciousand wide awake. These mental states are very much akin to that of thetrained clairvoyant, and is the state which should be sought after byall clairvoyants, whether they are following the methods of Psychometry, Crystal Gazing, or that of Direct Clairvoyance--for the principle is oneand the same in all of such methods. "

The Dawn of Clairvoyance. 

A well-known authority on the subject of Psychic Development says:"Occasional flashes of clairvoyance sometimes comes to the highlycultured and spiritual-minded man, even though he may never have heardof the possibility of training such a faculty. In his case such glimpsesusually signify that he is approaching that stage in his evolution whenthese powers will naturally begin to manifest themselves. Theirappearance should serve as an additional stimulus to him to strive tomaintain that high standard of moral purity and mental balance withoutwhich clairvoyance is a curse and not a blessing to its possessor. Between those who are entirely unimpressionable and those who are infull possession of clairvoyant power, there are many intermediatestages. Students often ask how this clairvoyant faculty will first bemanifested in themselves--how they may know when they have reached thestage at which its first faint foreshadowings are beginning to bevisible. Cases differ so widely that it is impossible to give to thisquestion any answer that will be universally applicable. Some peoplebegin by a plunge, as it were, and under some unusual stimulus becomeable just for once to see some striking vision; and very often in such acase, because the experience does not repeat itself, the seer comes intime to believe that on that occasion he must have been the victim ofhallucination. Others begin by becoming intermittently conscious of thebrilliant colors and vibrations of the human aura; yet others findthemselves with increasing frequency seeing and hearing something towhich those around them are blind and deaf; others, again, see faces, landscapes, or colored clouds floating before their eyes in the dark, before they sink to rest; while perhaps the commonest experience of allis that of those who begin to recollect with greater and greaterclearness what they have seen and heard on other planes during sleep. "

Methods of Development. 

The same authority, after warning students against attempting to developtheir psychic powers by unnatural and harmful practices, such asself-hypnotism, self-stupefication, etc. , gives the following excellentadvice concerning the normal development of clairvoyant and other highpsychic powers and faculties: "There is one practice which if adoptedcarefully and reverently can do no harm to any human being, yet fromwhich a very pure type of clairvoyance has sometimes been developed--andthat is the practice of Meditation. Let a man choose a certain timeevery day--a time when he can rely upon being quiet and undisturbed, though preferably in the daytime rather than at night--and set himselfat that time to keep his mind for a few minutes entirely free from allearthly thoughts of any kind whatsoever; and, when that is achieved, todirect the whole force of his being towards the highest ideal he happensto know. He will find that to gain perfect control of thought isenormously more difficult than he supposes, but when he attains it thiscannot but be in every way more beneficial to him, and as he grows moreand more able to elevate and concentrate his thoughts, he may graduallyfind that new worlds are opening before his sight. As a preliminarytraining towards the satisfactory achievement of such meditation, hewill find it desirable to make a practice of concentration in theaffairs of daily life--even in the smallest of them. If he writes aletter, let him think of nothing else but that letter until it isfinished; if he reads a book, let him see to it that his thought isnever allowed to wander away from his author's meaning. He must learn tohold his mind in check, and to be master of that also, as well as of hislower passions; he must patiently labor to acquire absolute control ofhis thoughts, so that he will always know exactly what he is thinkingabout, and why--so that he can use his mind, and turn it or hold itstill, as a practiced swordsman turns his weapon where he will. "

PART V

CLAIRVOYANCE: PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE

As we have said in the preceding chapter, in our consideration of thegeneral subject of Clairvoyance, there is possible a generalclassification of clairvoyant phenomena according to generaldistinctions, as follows: (1) PRESENT CLAIRVOYANCE, in which the objectsperceived by the clairvoyant are present in time and in space, althoughinvisible to normal sight; (2) SPACE CLAIRVOYANCE, in which theclairvoyant vision includes objects and scenes removed in space from thenormal perception of the clairvoyant; and (3) TIME CLAIRVOYANCE, inwhich the clairvoyant perceives objects or scenes removed from him inpast time, or future time. 

While the general methods of manifesting these various forms ofclairvoyant power are practically the same, yet the nature of theseseveral forms of phenomena vary considerably, as we shall see when wecome to consider them in detail in the following pages: this isparticularly true in the case of the distinction between past-timeclairvoyant phenomena, and future-time clairvoyant phenomena--thedifference between the perception of what has been, and that which hasnot yet been. 

Present Clairvoyance. 

In what is called Present Clairvoyance the objects perceived by theclairvoyant are present in time and in space, at the moment and place ofthe perception, although invisible to normal sight. It is seen at oncethat if the object seen clairvoyantly is present in time and in space tothe clairvoyant, and yet is incapable of being perceived by the normalsight of the clairvoyant, then that object must be capable of beingperceived only through vibrations above the normal range of the humansenses. Perhaps the precise nature of this class of clairvoyantperceptions will be better understood by a more detailed description ofthe objects actually perceived by clairvoyant vision of this mode ofmanifestation. 

The Human Aura. 

In the first place, this mode of clairvoyant vision discloses theinteresting phenomena concerned with the human aura, or psychicatmosphere which surrounds the human body for a space of several feet, assuming an egg-shaped form. A writer says on this point: "The trainedclairvoyant vision sees the human aura as a nebulous hazy substance, like a luminous cloud, surrounding the person for two or three feet oneach side of his body, becoming more dense near the body, and graduallybecoming less dense as it extends away from the body. It has aphosphorescent appearance, with a peculiar tremulous motion manifestingthrough its substance. The clairvoyant sees the human aura as composedof all the colors of the spectrum, the combination shifting with thechanging mental and emotional states of the person. But, in a generalway, it may be said that each person has his or her distinctive astralauric colors, depending upon his or her general character orpersonality. Each mental state, or emotional manifestation, has its ownparticular shade or combination of shades of auric coloring. Thisbeautiful kaleidoscopic spectacle has its own meaning to the occultistwith clairvoyant vision, for he is thus able to read the character andgeneral mental states of the person by means of studying his auriccolors. The human aura is not in a state of calm phosphorescence, however. On the contrary, it sometimes manifests great flames, likethose of a fiery furnace, which shoot forth great tongues, and dartforth suddenly in certain directions toward the objects attracting them. Under great emotional excitement the auric flames move around in swiftcircling whirlpools, or else swirl away from a centre. Again, it seemsto throw forth tiny glistening sparks of psychic vibrations, some ofwhich travel for a great distance. 

The Prana Aura. 

"The clairvoyant vision is also able to discern what is called the'prana aura' of a person. By this term is indicated that peculiaremanation of vital force which surrounds the physical body of each andevery person. In fact, many persons of but slight clairvoyant power, whocannot sense the auric colors, are able to perceive this prana aurawithout trouble. It is sometimes called the 'health aura, ' or 'physicalaura. ' It is colorless, or rather about the shade of clear glass, diamond, or water. It is streaked with very minute, bristle-like lines. In a state of good health these fine lines are stiff like toothbrushbristles; while in the case of poor health these lines droop, curl, andpresent a furlike appearance. It is sometimes filled with minutesparkling particles, like tiny vibratory motion. To the clairvoyantvision the prana aura appears like the vibrating heated air arising froma fire, or stove, or from the heated earth in summertime. If the studentwill close his eyes partially, and peer through narrowed eyelids, hewill in all probability be able to perceive this prana aura surroundingthe body of some healthy, vigorous person--particularly if that personbe standing in a dim light. Looking closely, he will see the peculiarvibratory motion, like heated air, at a distance of about two inchesfrom the body of the person. It requires a little practice in order toacquire the knack of perceiving these vibrations--a little experimentingin order to get just the right light on the person--but practice willbring success, and you will be repaid for your trouble. In the same way, the student may by practice acquire the faculty of perceiving his ownprana aura. The simplest way to obtain this last mentioned result is toplace your fingers (spread out into fan-shape) against a blackbackground, in a dim light. Then gaze at the fingers through narrowedeyelids, and half-closed eyes. After a little practice, you will see afine thin line surrounding your fingers on all sides--a semi-luminousborder of prana aura. In most cases this border of aura is colorless, but sometimes a very pale yellowish hue is perceived. The stronger thevital force of the person, the stronger and brighter will this border ofprana aura appear. The aura surrounding the fingers will appear verymuch like the semi-luminous radiance surrounding a gas-flame, or theflame of a candle, which is familiar to everyone. "

The Auric Colors. 

Another writer says of the clairvoyant perception of the human aura: "Ashe looks, the clairvoyant will see himself surrounded by the luminousmist of the aura, flashing with all sorts of brilliant colors, andconstantly changing hue and brilliancy with every variation of theperson's thought and feelings. He will see this aura flooded with thebeautiful rose-color of pure affection, the rich blue of devotionalfeeling, the hard, dull brown of selfishness, the deep scarlet of anger, the horrible lurid red of sensuality, the livid grey of fear, the blackclouds of hatred and malice, or any of the other hundredfold indicationsso easily to be read in it by the practiced eye; and thus it will beimpossible for any persons to conceal from his the real state of theirfeelings on any subject. Not only does the astral aura show him thetemporary result of the emotion passing through it at the moment, but italso gives him, by an arrangement and proportion of its colors when in acondition of perfect rest, a clue to the general disposition andcharacter of its owner. "

Thought Forms. 

Another phase of clairvoyant phenomena of this class is that of theperception of "thought forms, " as they are called by occultists. As allstudents of occultism know, a strong thought or emotion manifests acertain high vibratory motion, and takes upon itself a vibratory "form"which is plainly perceptible to the trained clairvoyant vision. Thesethought-forms manifest a great variety in appearance and character. Someappear in a faint wave-like form, something like the tiny waves causedby the dropping of a pebble in a pond of water. Others take on awhirlpool form, rotating and whirling as they move through space. Othersappear like whirling rings, similar in general form to the "ring" puffedforth from the mouth of a cigar smoker, or from the funnel of alocomotive. Others glow like great opals. Others appear like jetsemitted from the spout of a teakettle. Others twist along like acorkscrew. Others appear like exploding bombs. Others branch out armslike a devil-fish, which wriggle in all directions, as if striving toattach themselves to some object upon which they wish to take hold. 

The X-Ray Sense. 

Another phase of clairvoyant phenomena of this general class is thatwhich may be called "the X-Ray Sense, " for indeed it enables theclairvoyant to see through a brick wall, or other material obstacle, orthrough a sealed letter, etc. The higher psychic vibrations easily passthrough the most solid object, just as do the X-Rays, and consequentlythe clairvoyant is able to see what is going on on the other side of abrick wall, or the walls of a house. Likewise, the clairvoyant vision isable to pierce through the dense earth, and to perceive veins of mineralor metal lying concealed beneath. 

Microscopic Vision. 

Another phase of clairvoyant power of this general class, but one notnearly so common as those above mentioned, is described by a well-knownoccultist as follows: "Another strange power of which the clairvoyantmay find himself in possession is that of magnifying at will theminutest physical particle to any desired size, as through amicroscope--though no microscope ever made, or ever likely to be made, possesses even a thousandth part of this psychic magnifying power. Byits means the hypothetical molecule and atom postulated by sciencebecomes visible and living realities to the occult student, and on thiscloser examination he finds them to be much more complex in theirstructure than the scientific man has yet realized them to be. It alsoenables him to follow with the closest attention and the most livelyinterest all kinds of electrical, magnetic, and other etheric action;and when some of the specialists in these branches of science are ableto develop the power to see these things whereof they speak so facilely, some very wonderful and beautiful revelations may be expected. "

Space Clairvoyance. 

In what is called Space Clairvoyance the objects, persons, scenes, orevents perceived by the clairvoyant are removed in space from him--oftenbeing located at points in space thousands of miles distant, in fact. The pages of works upon occultism, and those devoted to the recording ofproved instances gathered by the societies for psychical research, arefilled with the most interesting cases of this form of clairvoyantvision. Instances are recorded, upon the very best possible authority, in which persons with clairvoyant powers have been perfectly cognizantof events occurring on the other side of the world, or across theAtlantic or Pacific Oceans. In fact, it would seem that distance andspace are practically wiped out in this form of clairvoyant phenomena, and that it is just as easy to see clairvoyantly over the space of athousand miles, as over that of a hundred feet--the principle involvedbeing precisely the same. 

The Psychic Telescope. 

Space Clairvoyance, or Distant Clairvoyance, is manifested in the formof Psychometry, Crystal Gazing, or Direct Clairvoyance, as we have said. We do not consider it necessary to record here any typical instances ofthis phase of phenomena, as the many books on this subject are chieflydevoted to a recital thereof, and every student is more or lessacquainted with the same. The whole matter may be summed up by sayingthat in this form of clairvoyant vision, there is manifested what mightbe called a "psychic telescope with an X-Ray attachment, " thus enablingone to see at any distance, and through any intervening objects. Thisgives you a mental picture of the process. 

Radio-Activity. 

In the theory of vibratory forces, as set forth in the earlier chaptersof this book, we have the only scientific explanation of the phenomenaof distant clairvoyance. Modern science, in its teachings regarding theradio-activity of physical objects, has thrown much additional light onthis subject, and has corroborated the ancient occult teachings on thesubject. These rays of higher vibratory power are like the rays of lightor heat, although of a much higher rate of intensity and vibratorymotion, and though the most delicate scientific instruments are able toregister some of these, it is still practically admitted by science thatthe highest of these radio-active vibrations are beyond the scope andfield of even the most sensitive instrument yet known to science. Thisis saying much when we remember that some of the delicate instruments ofscience are so sensitive that they are able to register the heat wavesof a candle at the distance of one mile; while others are able to recordthe presence of certain chemical elements in the most distant of thevisible stars, by means of the light waves carrying certain forms ofvibration. 

Sensing the Higher Vibrations. 

Under the radio-active theory it is quite reasonable to conceive of theclairvoyant sense being able to register and interpreting these highervibrations which are beyond the power of even the most delicateinstruments of science. It must be admitted that the existence of suchvibrations being granted--and science tacitly admits theirpresence--then ordinary distances on earth would be no barrier at all tothe action of clairvoyant vision capable of registering them. Moreover, in such case all intervening objects would be penetrated by these waves, and as a writer has well said, "they would be able to cross one anotherto infinity in all directions without entanglement, precisely as thevibrations of ordinary light do. " Physical science and psychic scienceat last seem to have arrived at a common ground of understanding, andmany of the most advanced scientists do not hesitate to admit thisfact, though their more conservative brethren hesitate to do so. 

Viewing Distant Scenes. 

A writer has said of this form of clairvoyant perception: "The view of adistant scene obtained in this way is in many ways not unlike that seenthrough a telescope. Human figures usually appear very small, like thoseupon a distant stage, but in spite of their diminutive size they areclear as though they were close by. Sometimes it is possible by thismeans to hear what is said as well as to see what is done; but as in themajority of cases this does not happen, we must consider it rather asthe manifestation of an additional power than as a necessary corollaryof the faculty of sight. It will be observed that in cases of this kindthe clairvoyant does not actually leave his physical body at all--hesimply manufactures for himself, and uses, a kind of psychic telescope. Consequently he has the use of his physical powers while he is examiningthe distant scene; for example, his voice usually describes what he seeseven while he is in the act of making the observation. "

Time Clairvoyance. 

In what is called Time Clairvoyance the clairvoyant is able to perceiveobjects, persons, scenes, and events removed from him in past time orfuture time. That is to say, the clairvoyant perceives things which haveexisted in the physical world in times long past, which things have longsince vanished from physical existence; or, on the other hand, heperceives things which belong to future existence--this which havenever as yet been in physical existence, and of course are not in suchexistence at the present time. The careful student will see at once thatthe principle of manifestation governing these two respective phases ofclairvoyance must be quite different; and, accordingly, the tworespective phases must be considered separately and apart from eachother. 

Past Time Clairvoyance. 

In what is known as Past Time Clairvoyance there is the manifestation ofclairvoyant vision in the direction of scenes and occurrences of thepast. Here, the clairvoyant perceives the events and scenes of past timejust as clearly and plainly as if such were present before him in timeand in space. Just as in Distant Clairvoyance it is just as easy for theclairvoyant to see things at a great distance as those at a shortdistance, so in Past Time Clairvoyance it is just as easy for theclairvoyant to see things and events occurring five thousand years agoas it is to see things occurring one year ago, or one week ago for thatmatter. The principle involved is the same in either case. 

The Mystery of Seeing the Past. 

To persons investigating the phenomena of clairvoyance for the firsttime, however, there seems to be a much greater mystery attached to thephenomena of Past Clairvoyance than in the case of Distant Clairvoyance. To such persons it seems that while the perception of distant objects, scenes, and events is wonderful and mysterious, still at the last it ismerely the perception of something now actually in existence--merelythe extension of one's normal powers of vision so as to include objectsbeyond the range of the ordinary vision, but, still, actually inexistence though at a distance. The idea of the telescope enables themind to grasp the naturalness of this kind of phenomena. But when itcomes to the perception of things, scenes, and events WHICH ARE NOLONGER IN EXISTENCE--things which have passed entirely out ofexistence--the mystery seems to be increased, and incredulity becomesmore insistent. But to the occultist there is really no more mystery inthe one case than in the other--both sets of phenomena are seen to beperfectly reasonable and within the realms of Nature. Let us now see howand why the occultists view the matter in this light. 

Analogies on the Physical Plane. 

We may find many correspondences on the physical plane to serve asillustrations of the phenomena of Past Time Clairvoyance, if we will butlook for them. For instance, when we withdraw a heated stove from aroom, the heat remains in the room. Likewise, though a woman bearing theodor of a certain perfume on her clothing may have passed from a house, the odor still lingers there. The wake of an ocean steamer is oftenvisible for hours after the ship has passed from sight. As modernscience expressed it: "Causes continue to exist in their Effects. "

Thousand-Year-Old Light. 

But we have a much more striking illustration and correspondence in thecase of the transmission of light from the distant stars, which we willdo well to carefully consider. Light travels at the rate of 186, 000miles per second. A "light-year, " as known to astronomers, means thedistance traversed by a light wave (at the stated rate of travel) duringthe period of one of our earth years. Some of the distant stars areestimated to be fully one thousand light-years distant from us; or, inother words, the light we now perceive as coming from them really is thelight that left them one thousand years ago. If one of these stars wereto be destroyed, observers on this earth would not become aware of itfor a thousand years. The star whose light we may now perceive mayactually have been destroyed nearly one thousand years ago. Other starsare only one hundred light-years removed from us in space; others only afew years; others only a few hours. But the principle is just the samein all cases, namely, that we see the stars not as they are at thepresent moment, but as they were when the light left them, perhaps manyyears ago. Thus, as you see, we may actually perceive events long aftertheir happening. 

Reading the Light Waves. 

Now, if our physical vision was sufficiently powerful to magnify objectson the stars, or if we had instruments to do this for us, we couldactually witness scenes, objects, persons and events which had passedout of existence a thousand years ago. Their records are present inthese light waves from the stars, and all that is needed is an eye or atelescope sufficiently strong to register them upon our mind. In afanciful story written by Camille Flammarion, the French astronomer, many years ago, the principal character relates how, traveling in theastral body, he was able to witness the events of the French Revolutionwhich had occurred many years before, by simply proceeding to thenecessary distance from the earth and there perceiving the registeredrecords in the earth's light-waves traveling through space at the rateof 186, 000 miles a second. In fact, by getting at the right distance hewas able to see even the events of his own childhood and youth, everyevent of his life, in fact, up to the moment of his leaving the earth. This story, fanciful as it is, nevertheless is based upon scientificfacts, and its happenings would be quite possible for a being capable oftraveling at a sufficiently rapid rate through space, and also possessedof the power of magnifying the records of light rays. In fact, a personon earth possessing the power of Distant Clairvoyance might be able toduplicate these feats, providing he were able to come in rapport contactwith one of these light-waves bearing the past-time records. Think for amoment, and you will grasp the point of this statement. 

The Akashic Plane. 

But this, however, is but an illustration of the correspondence on theordinary physical plane of certain things on a higher plane of Nature. Past Time Clairvoyance is not dependent upon light-waves, or any otherof the lesser phases of vibratory activity. Instead, it depends entirelyupon the phenomena and facts of a higher plane of Nature--a plane whichoccultists have called the Akashic Plane. Some occultists prefer thegeneral term, "the Astral Plane, " but the former term is a closer andmore definite one. The Akashic Plane, as known to occultists, containsthe impressions or "records" of all events that have happened on theearth plane during the present cycle of earth manifestation. The verysubtle and tenuous substance of the Akashic Plane--the term "etheric"may best describe the nature of this substance--contains traces andimpressions of all the happenings of the past of this earth; and suchimpressions may be read and seen by the clairvoyant who has developedsufficiently high powers of vision. These Akashic Records have well beencalled "the substantial memory of the earth. " Upon the subtle ethericsubstance of the Akashic Plane are registered the records of everyevent, thing, object, happening, or activity of the earth which hasexisted or been manifested from the very beginning of the present cycleof the earth's existence. These records will, it is claimed, persistuntil the final ending of the present earth cycle. 

The Akashic Records. 

The clairvoyant whose powers of Past Time Clairvoyance have beendeveloped sufficiently, and who has mastered the art of concentration ofhis psychic attention, manages to come into more or less perfect enrapport condition contact with these Akashic Records, and is thusenabled to read from them what he sees there. To him it actually seemsas if he were seeing the actions of things in present existence, andmany excellent clairvoyants are ignorant of the existence of the AkashicRecords, though they habitually read the contents thereof; theseclairvoyants know simply that they "see" these past happenings--theyhave not the faintest conception of how they are able to see them. Thisis no more strange than would be the case of a man who witnessed amoving picture for the first time, and who was ignorant of the mechanisminvolved in the showing of the picture, the existence of the film, etc. , --such a man would simply know that he "saw" the things, and hemight even believe that he was gazing upon an actual scene in real life. 

Degrees of Clairvoyant Vision. 

There is, of course, many degrees of power and development amongclairvoyants of this class; and as a result we have many varying degreesof correctness in their readings. Some have merely a glimpse, as throughdim glasses; and some obtain merely distorted reflections similar tothose of a scene reflected into the troubled waters of a lake. Otherssee far more clearly; but it is reserved for the trained occultist toread the records as he would read the scene before him on the physicalplane. The clairvoyant does not become infallible simply by reason ofthe perhaps only faint awakening of his clairvoyant vision--he is notsuddenly gifted with omniscience, as some seem to suppose. There arealmost always elements of error or imperfect visioning, except among theadvanced adepts of the occult world. 

"The Memory of Nature. "

A celebrated occultist says concerning the point just raised:"Comparatively few accounts of persons possessing this faculty oflooking into the past are to be found in the literature of the subject, and it might therefore be supposed to be much less common thanprevision, or future-time clairvoyance. I suspect, however, that thetruth is rather that it is much less commonly recognized. It may easilyhappen that a person may see a picture of the past without recognizingit as such, unless there happens to be in it something which attractsspecial attention, such as a figure in armor, or in antique costume. Itis probable that occasional glimpses of these reflections of the AkashicRecords are commoner than the published accounts would lead us tobelieve. As usual, we find examples of all degrees of the power to seeinto this 'memory of Nature, ' from the trained man who can consult therecord for himself at will, down to the person who gets nothing butoccasional vague glimpses, or has even perhaps had only one suchglimpse. But even the man who possesses this faculty only partially andoccasionally may still find it of the deepest interest. 

Involuntary Clairvoyance. 

"The psychometrist, who needs an object physically connected with thepast in order to bring it all into life again around him; and thecrystal-gazer who can sometimes direct his less certain astral telescopeto some historic scene of long ago, may both derive the greatestenjoyment from the exercise of their respective gifts, even though theymay not always understand exactly how their results are produced, andmay not have them fully under control under all circumstances. In manycases of the lower manifestation of these powers we find that they areexercised unconsciously; many a crystal-gazer watches scenes from thepast without ever realizing that he is in effect psychometrizing thevarious objects around him as he happens to touch them or stand nearthem. It would be well for all students to bear in mind that occultismis the apotheosis of common sense, and that every vision that comes tothem is not necessarily a picture from the Akashic Records, nor everyexperience a revelation from on high. It is far better to err on theside of healthy scepticism than that of over-credulity; and it is anadmirable rule never to hunt for an occult explanation of anything whena plain and obvious physical one is available. Our duty is to keep ourbalance always, and never to lose our self-control, but to take areasonable, common-sense view of whatever may happen to us. "

Future Time Clairvoyance. 

In what is known technically as Future Time Clairvoyance, we have themanifestation of the clairvoyant vision in the direction of scenes andevents of the future. In this phase of clairvoyance the seer perceivesthe events and scenes of future time just as if they were present beforehim at that very moment. This phase of clairvoyance is far rarer andmore uncommon than any of the other phases. In fact, it is so seldom metwith in its perfection that its manifestation is a matter of greatestinterest to those who make a study of the subject. It occasionallyoccurs in flashes, and can not be produced at will by the ordinaryclairvoyant. Unfortunately, its very rarity and uncommonness cause it tobe counterfeited and imitated by unprincipled persons. 

Seeing What Has Not Yet Happened. 

The student who reasons carefully and logically usually meets with whatto him, at least at first, seems to be an unsurmountable obstacle inthe way of a rational explanation of Future Time Clairvoyance--when itcomes to an understanding of how anyone can expect to see, or can reallysee, THAT WHICH HAS NEVER HAPPENED, he throws up his hands in despair. But, in this as in all the other phases of clairvoyant phenomena, thereis found a reason and cause, although it requires some subtle thinkingto find it, and to grasp it even when it is found. Let us see what arethe highest teachings on this subject, as announced by the carefulthinkers along the lines for many centuries. 

Simple Prevision. 

There is a phase of prevision, or prophecy of coming events, however, that is not true clairvoyance at all, but simply the subconsciousworkings of the mind along the lines of a supernormal perception of thelaws of cause and effect. Give the active subconscious mental facultiesthe perception of a strong existing cause, and it will often reason outthe probable effect (the almost certain effect, in fact) of that cause, even though that effect lies in the mist of the future. The subconsciousmind works upon the principle that "coming events cast their shadowsbefore. " But this, at the best, is not true clairvoyance--it is merelythe statement of "probable" results, and effects of existing causes, wonderfully exact and clear though the deduction may be in some cases. But a thousand-and-one unforeseen things may arise to completely upsetthe prediction, or deduction, for it is never actually true until itoccurs. We must look further for real instances of Future Clairvoyance. 

The Nature of Time. 

That eminent scientist, Sir Oliver Lodge, offers an ingenious andinteresting, though very technical explanation of this class ofclairvoyant phenomena as follows: "Time is but a relative mode ofregarding things; we progress through phenomena at a certain definitepace, and this subjective advance we interpret in an objective manner, as if events moved necessarily in this order and at this precise rate. But that may be only one mode of regarding them. The events may be insome sort of existence always, both past and future, and it may be wewho are arriving at them, not they which are happening. The analogy of atraveler in a railway train is useful; if he could never leave thetrain, nor alter its pace, he would probably consider the landscapes asnecessarily successive, and be unable to conceive their co-existence. Weperceive, therefore, a possible fourth dimensional aspect about time, the inexorableness of whose flow may be a natural part of our presentlimitations. And if we once grasp the idea that past and future may beactually existing, we can recognize that they may have a controllinginfluence on all present action, and the two together may constitute the'higher plane' or totality of things after which, it seems to me, we areimpelled to seek, in connection with the directing of form ordeterminism, and the action of human beings consciously directed to adefinite and preconceived end. "

The Oriental Teaching. 

The Hindus, and other oriental peoples, however, have a clearly definedand positive explanation of the phenomena of Future Time Clairvoyance, which must be included in our consideration of the subject, even thoughit does involve certain metaphysical or philosophical conceptions whichare apart from our present inquiry as conducted in this book. Theoriental theory is based upon that basic conception of the easternphilosophies which hold that the beginning, duration, and ending of anyparticular one of the infinitude of successive universes created by theSupreme Being, is to that Being but as a single moment of time; or, asthe celebrated Hindu proverb runs: "The creation, duration, anddestruction of a universe is but the time of the twinkling of an eye toBrahman. " In other words, that to the Supreme Being, all the past, allthe present, all the future of the universe, must be as but a singlethought in a single moment of time--an instantaneous act ofconsciousness. 

The Eternal Now. 

A writer on this subject has said: "Those occultists and metaphysicianswho have thought long and deeply upon the ultimate facts and nature ofthe universe, have dared to think that there must exist some absoluteconsciousness--some absolute mind--which must perceive the past, present, and future of the universe as one happening; as simultaneouslyand actively present at one moment of absolute time. They reason thatjust as a man may see at one moment of his time some particular eventwhich might appear as a year to some minute form of life and mind--themicroscopic creatures in a drop of water, for instance--so that whichseems as a year, or as a hundred years, to the mind of man, may appearas the happening of a single moment of a higher scale of time to someexalted Being, or form of consciousness on a higher plane. "

Absolute Time

The daring flights of metaphysical fancy have resulted in the generalacceptance, on the part of advanced metaphysicians, of the postulate ofthe existence of an Absolute Mind, independent of Time and Space, towhich everything exists HERE and NOW. To such a mind the entire sequenceof events in the life-history of a universe would appear as a singleunit of conscious experience--an infinitesimal point of time inEternity. The human imagination staggers at the idea, but logicalthought finally posits it as an unescapable conclusion of extendedthought. This, possibly, is the secret of Future Time Clairvoyance, Prevision, Second Sight, etc. 

The Occult Hypothesis. 

But it must not be supposed that the oriental occultists hold for amoment the theory that the clairvoyant actually obtains access to theDivine Mind or Absolute Mind, when he experiences this vision of futureevents--their idea is very different from this. These occultists teachthat the phenomena of each plane are reflected with more or lessclearness upon the substance of the planes beneath it. This being so, itis readily seen that the seer who is able to contact with any of thehigher planes of being might thereupon see the reflection, more or lessclear, or more or less distorted, of that which is present in itscompleteness on the highest plane of all. This is a mere hint at thequite complicated occult teaching on this subject; but the capablethinker will be able to work out the full theory for himself in his ownway. The important fact is that Future Time Clairvoyance is areality--that it is a matter of actual experience of the race, and onethat has been authenticated by the investigations of such learned bodiesas the Society for Psychical Research, of England, and other societiesof the same kind in different lands. Future Time Clairvoyance, SecondSight, Prevision, etc. , are facts as fully accepted by such societies asare the facts of telepathy. 

"The Prophecy of Cazotte. "

Students of history are familiar with the numerous recorded instances ofmarvelous prophecy of future events, wonderful predictions of events tocome, which have been fully corroborated and verified by subsequentevents. We lack the space in this book to record more than one of themost celebrated of these historical prophecies, namely the Prophecy ofCazotte. We have thought it advisable to reproduce the story of thiscelebrated prophecy, as told by La Harpe, the French writer, who waspresent upon the occasion. It may be mentioned that the fact of thisprophecy, and its literal fulfilment, is a part of French history. Thetime was just previous to the French Revolution, and the tale as told byLa Harpe is as follows:

The Dinner of the Elect. 

"It appears as but yesterday, and yet, nevertheless, it was at thebeginning of the year 1788. We were dining with one of the brethren atthe Academy--a man of considerable wealth and genius. The conversationbecame serious; much admiration was expressed on the revolution ofthought which Voltaire had effected, and it was agreed that it was hisfirst claim to the reputation he enjoyed. We concluded that therevolution must soon be consummated; that it was indispensable thatsuperstition and fanaticism should give way to philosophy, and we beganto calculate the probability of the period when this should be, andwhich of the present company should live to see it. The oldestcomplained that they could hardly flatter themselves with the hope; theyounger rejoiced that they might entertain this very probableexpectation; and they congratulated the Academy especially for havingprepared this great work, and for having been the rallying point, thecentre, and the prime mover of the liberty of thought. 

The Illuminatus. 

"One only of the guests had not taken part in all the joyousness of thisconversation, and had even gently and cheerfully checked our splendidenthusiasm. This was Cazotte, an amiable and original man, but unhappilyinfatuated with the reveries of the Illuminati. He spoke, and with themost serious tone, saying: 'Gentlemen, be satisfied; you will all seethis great and sublime revolution, which you so much desire. You knowthat I am a little inclined to prophecy; I repeat, you will see it. ' Hewas answered by the common rejoinder: 'One need not be a conjurer to seethat. ' He answered: 'Be it so; but perhaps one must be a little morethan conjurer for what remains for me to tell you. Do you know whatwill be the consequences of this revolution--what will be theconsequences to all of you, and what will be the immediate result--thewell-established effect--the thoroughly recognized consequences to allof you who are here present?'

The Beginning of the Prophecy. 

"'Ah, ' said Condorcet, with his insolent and half-suppressed smile, 'letus hear--a philosopher is not sorry to encounter a prophet--let ushear?' Cazotte replied: 'You, Monsieur de Condorcet--you will yield upyour last breath on the floor of a dungeon; you will die from poison, which you will have taken in order to escape from execution--from poisonwhich the happiness of that time will oblige you to carry around yourperson. You, Monsieur de Chamfort, you will open your veins withtwenty-two cuts of a razor, and yet will not die till some monthsafterward. ' These personages looked at each other, and laughed again. Cazotte continued: 'You, Monsieur Vicq d'Azir, you will not open yourown veins, but you will cause yourself to be bled six times in one day, during the paroxysm of the gout, in order to make more sure of your end, and you will die in the night. '

The Shadow of the Guillotine. 

"Cazotte went on: 'You, Monsieur de Nicolai, you will die on thescaffold; you, Monsieur Bailly, on the scaffold; you, Monsieur deMalesherbes, on the scaffold. ' 'Ah, God be thanked, ' exclaimed Roucherm, 'and what of I?' Cazotte replied: 'You! you also will die on thescaffold. ' 'Yes, ' replied Chamfort, 'but when will all this happen?'Cazotte answered: 'Six years will not pass over, before all that I havesaid to you shall be accomplished. ' Here I (La Harpe) spoke, saying:'Here are some astonishing miracles, but you have not included me inyour list. ' Cazotte answered me, saying: 'But you will be there, as anequally extraordinary miracle; you will then be a Christian!' Vehementexclamations on all sides followed this startling assertion. 'Ah!' saidChamfort, 'I am comforted; for if we perish only when La Harpe shall bea Christian, we are immortal!'

The Fall of the Great. 

"'Then, ' observed Madame la Duchesse de Grammont, 'as for that, wewomen, we are happy to be counted for nothing in this revolution; when Isay for nothing, it is not that we do not always mix ourselves up withthem a little; but it is a received maxim that they take no notice ofus, and of our sex. ' 'Your sex, ladies, ' said Cazotte, 'your sex willnot protect you this time; and you had far better meddle with nothing, for you will be treated entirely as men, without any differencewhatever. ' 'But what, then, are you really telling us of, MonsieurCazotte? You are preaching to us the end of the world. ' 'I know nothingon that subject; but what I do know is, that you, Madame la Duchesse, will be conducted to the scaffold, you and many other ladies with you, in the cart of the executioner, and with your hands tied behind yourbacks. ' 'All! I hope that in that case I shall at least have a carriagehung in black. ' 'No, Madame; higher ladies than yourself will go, likeyou, in the common car, with their hands tied behind them. ' 'Higherladies! what! the princesses of the blood?' 'Yea, and still more exaltedpersonages!' replied Cazotte. 

The Fate of Royalty. 

"Here a sensible emotion pervaded the whole company, and the countenanceof the host was dark and lowering--they began to feel that the joke wasbecoming too serious. Madame de Grammont, in order to dissipate thecloud, took no notice of the last reply, and contented herself withsaying in a careless tone: 'You see, he will not leave me even aconfessor!' 'No, madame!' replied Cazotte, 'you will not haveone--neither you, nor any one besides. The last victim to whom thisfavor will be afforded will be--' Here he stopped for a moment. 'Well, who then will be the happy mortal to whom this prerogative will begiven?' Cazotte replied: 'It is the only one which he will have thenretained--and that will be the King of France!' This last startlingprediction caused the company to disband in something like terror anddismay, for the mere mention of such things was akin to treason. "

The Fulfillment of the Prophecy. 

To appreciate the startling nature of the Cazotte prophecy at the timewhen it was made, one needs but to be even slightly acquainted with theposition and characteristics of the persons whose destinies were thusforetold. The amazing sequel to this wonderful prophecy is told byhistory--within six years every detail thereof was verified absolutely. The facts are known to all students of French history of that period, and may be verified by reference to the pages of any comprehensivehistory of those times. 

Other Historical Instances. 

To mention but a few other celebrated instances of historic prophecy:George Fox, the pioneer Quaker Friend, had the clairvoyant faculty welldeveloped, and numerous instances of its manifestation by him arerecorded. For instance, he foretold the death of Cromwell, when he methim riding at Hampton Court; he said that he felt "a waft of death"around and about Cromwell--and Cromwell died shortly afterward. Fox alsopublicly foretold the dissolution of the Rump Parliament of England; therestoration of Charles II; and the Great Fire of London. Theseprophecies are all matters of history. For that matter, history containsmany instances of this kind, as, for instance, the prophecy of Caesar'sdeath, and its further prevision by his wife. The Bible prophecies andpredictions, major and minor, give us semi-historical instances. 

The Eternal Verities. 

As a writer has said concerning this phase of clairvoyant phenomena:"This phase of clairvoyance is very fascinating to the student and theinvestigator, and is one in which the highest psychic powers are calledinto play. There is a reflection here of something even higher than thepsychic plane--there is a glimpse of regions infinitely higher andgreater. The student here begins to realize at least something of theexistence of that universal Consciousness 'in which we live, and move, and have our being'; and of the existence of the reality of the EternalNow, in which past, present, and future are blended as one fact ofinfinite consciousness. He sees here the signboard pointing to theeternal verities!"

PART VI

MEDIUMSHIP

Among the higher categories of Nature's Finer Forces is included thatwhich is popularly known as "mediumship. " Although this term hassuffered more or less by reason of its misappropriation by certaincharlatans and the unprincipled exploiters of sincere investigators ofthe phenomena of the higher planes of existence, and also by reason of acertain prejudice against the term arising from misrepresentation andgeneral misunderstanding, the term still remains a perfectly legitimateone and one clearly indicating the nature of the general class ofphenomena sought to be embraced within its limits. Therefore there is novalid reason for its rejection in our consideration of the subject ofNature's Finer Forces in this book; and, accordingly, it is used here ina general way, although the more scientific term "higher planecommunication, " or similar terms, are employed herein in some cases. 

What Is Mediumship?

Let us see just what is meant by the term "mediumship. " The term"medium" is defined as: "That which lies in the middle, or between otherthings: hence, that through which anything is conveyed from one thingto another. " In a special sense, a "medium" is "a person serving as thechannel of communication between decarnate entities and human beingstill in the flesh, " in "spiritualistic phenomena. " The suffix "ship, "of course, denotes state or office; and in the case of "mediumship" itindicates that the designated person possesses the state or office of a"medium, " the latter term being used in the special meaning abovedefined. 

Of course, the term "mediumship, " as above defined, lacks a clearmeaning unless the term "spiritualistic, " or "spiritualism" be defined. The term "spiritualism" (or as many of the best authorities prefer tostate it, "spiritism") is applied to "a system of communication with theunseen world, or with the inhabitants thereof, the latter being usuallyknown as 'spirits, ' through persons called 'mediums, ' which has attainedpopular favor in Europe and America since about 1850. " Or, as anotherauthority states it, "Spiritualism is a term employed to indicate thebelief that departed spirits hold intercourse with mortals by means ofpsychical phenomena, commonly through a person of special susceptibilitycalled a 'medium. '"

Ancient Mediumship. 

It is, of course, unnecessary to state in detail the fact thatcommunication with decarnate entities has been known and practiced bythe human race from the earliest days of recorded history, andprobably long before that time, and is far from being a moderndiscovery. Moreover, such communication has been known and practicedby races of human beings other than those inhabiting Europe andAmerica--particularly in the oriental countries. In the oriental landssuch communication has been well established for many thousand years, and the most ancient records give evidences of it. The HebrewScriptures contain many instances of such communication, showing thatthe same was an accepted fact of the life of the race at the time andin the places at which these records were written. 

Mediumship and Religious Belief. 

The careful student will of course notice that this communication withthe higher planes of life and being--this so-called "mediumship"--doesnot depend upon any particular form of religious belief, or teaching, concerning the nature of the state or place of abode of the departedspirits of men; but, on the contrary, is common to all form of religionand to all phases of belief in the survival of the human soul. Therefore, a scientific consideration of the general subject does notnecessitate the acceptance of any one particular phase of religiousbelief, or of any particular system of teaching concerning the nature orstate of "life after death. " All that is required of the personaccepting the general fact of "higher plane communication" may be statedas follows: (1) Acceptance of the fact that the human soul persistsafter the death of the body, and independent of and removed from thedead body; (2) acceptance of the fact that the decarnate souls of humanbeings may, and do, establish communication with human beings stilldwelling upon the earth-plane of existence. 

We may state here that the term "decarnate" means "away from thephysical body, " or "out of the flesh;" the term being the opposite of"incarnate, " meaning "clothed with flesh, or embodied in flesh. " We mayalso state here that the teachings of most philosophies of the lifeafter death hold that the decarnate human soul is not entirely devoid ofa body, but rather occupies a body composed of some ethereal substance;this ethereal body being called the "astral body, " or the "spiritualbody. "

The Ideals of Modern Spiritualism. 

A writer well expresses the ideals of modern western spiritualism asfollows: "Through the gateway of mediumship for upwards of fifty yearsthe world has been catching glimpses of the glory of the land immortal, and visitants from that 'bourne' from whence it has been erroneouslysaid that 'no traveler returns' have made their presence known beyondall doubt or denial, thus proving the continued conscious existence ofhuman beings and the sequential chapter of the life hereafter. Thoughthe messages from the unseen have at times been imperfect andfragmentary, still they have been MESSAGES. If but telegraphicdispatches, so to speak, instead of voluminous letters; or liketelephonic snatches of conversation rather than face-to-face outpouringsof thought and feeling, still they have been greetings and comfortingassurances of undying affection from the people living in the land'beyond the veil. ' Although many a sorrowing soul has longed for furtherrevelation, and regretted the inability of the spirits to comply withthe requests for fuller information, still the gates have been ajar, andsometimes it has truly seemed as though they had been flung wideopen--so clear and consoling were the messages from the loved ones onthe other side of death's valley of shadow. The manifestations of thepresence of spirits and the evidences of their identity, which have beenaccumulating during all these years, have solved the 'great secret, ' andwe know that death is not a CUL-DE-SAC, but a thoroughfare. The dread ofdeath disappeared altogether with the mists of ignorance, as, throughthe gateway of mediumship, the shining presence of ministering spirits, 'our very own dear departed, ' illumined the pathway which we must alltread to our great promotion. 

Immortality Demonstrated Through Mediumship. 

"'Immortality demonstrated through mediumship' should be inscribed uponthe banner of spiritualism, for the fact of life beyond the incident ofdeath has been proved beyond all peradventure to millions of intelligentand enlightened people since the new spiritual era was inaugurated. Tomediums--the modern mediators--therefore belong the office and honor ofrolling back the stone from the tomb and establishing faith upon thefirm basis of knowledge (scientifically ascertained and proven) of thecontinued intelligent existence in the spiritual realms of those whowent forth through the death change into light and liberty 'over there. 'Mediums, as intermediaries, have enabled spirit people to comfort thesad and encourage the weak; to relieve the doubter and console thebereaved; to confirm the old-world traditions regarding bygone spiritintervention and revelation, and supplement our hopes and intuitionswith proof palpable. Present day experiences of inspiration and spiritmanifestation make credible and acceptable many things in ancientrecords which must otherwise have been discarded as superstitious andfalse. Spiritualism redeems the so-called 'supernatural' and'miraculous' occurrences of the Bible, by explaining them and provingthe naturalness. The capability claimed for old-time seers and prophetsto see angels and hear voices is now known to be a natural faculty, which, in certain people, is perfectly normal while it can be induced inothers by the influence of operators in or out of the body. IT CAN ALSOBE CULTIVATED TO SOME DEGREE BY MOST PEOPLE WHO CARE TO STUDY THENECESSARY CONDITIONS FOR ITS DEVELOPMENT AND EXERCISE. The famine, 'notof bread, nor of water, but of hearing words from the Lord, ' and theloss of 'open vision' of the spirit, which afflicted Christendom for somany years (because of the blind intolerance of zealots who, in theiradherence to the 'letter, ' crushed out the sensitives through whom the'spirit' might have been revealed), that famine is rapidly passing away, and we are being fed with the living bread of spiritual inspiration, andare growing strong enough to welcome the messengers who come to usthrough the gateway of mediumship from their after-death home. 

The Truth of Personal Survival. 

"When once there is established the conviction of the truth of personalsurvival of our loved ones, and the actual and satisfactorydemonstrations thereof through mediumship (and we know of no meanswhereby such evidences can be obtained save through mediumship), we arethrilled and delighted; and when this conviction is borne upon us anddriven home by the evidences, and the truth of spirit ministry has beenrealized, nothing can destroy it. The spiritualist stands upon firmground--the impregnable rock of ascertained fact. He knows thatintercourse between the two worlds is real, continuous; therefore he isproof against all speculations, denunciations, and adverse theories. Dogmatic condemnations, 'bogey' cries, charges of fraud against mediums, fail to move or frighten him. He can 'speak what he knows and testify towhat he has seen;' his positive and affirmative experience and testimonyoutweigh all the opposition of 'doubting Thomases' who do not know. 

The Gateway of Mediumship. 

"Through the gateway of mediumship the spirits make themselves known ina variety of ways. There are many phases of mediumistic phenomena, andthe student will find that he must be patient, painstaking, andpersevering if he would make sure of his facts. Careful investigation, possibly prolonged research, under many difficulties and with manydiscouragements, will be required, but 'success is certain if energyfail not, ' and the results will adequately recompense him for allsacrifice and struggle! For in the light of the demonstrated fact ofcontinued existence after death, it is clear that man is even now 'aspirit served by organs'--that consequently the basis of all religiousexperience and affirmation is the spiritual consciousness of mankind. There could be no revelation to man of spiritual truth or moral duty ifhe were not a spirit possessing the capabilities of receiving andcomprehending, of interpreting and applying, the revelations andinspirations which appeal to and quicken the inner (and higher) self. "

The Mediumistic Character. 

The following quotations from eminent modern spiritualists will furtherserve to illustrate the accepted general principles of "spiritcommunication" on the part of western spiritualism. E. W. Wallis says:"Spiritualism deals with a higher range and a wider field ofsupersensuous phenomena than mesmerism, hypnotism, telepathicpsychometry, clairvoyance, etc. , because the natural susceptibility ofman in these directions is increased and intensified, and exercised upona superior plane, when it is utilized by intelligent spirit operators. It is not true that sensitiveness is confined to those who are diseased, weak of will, neurotic, or hysterical. Those who are susceptible topsychic influence may be impulsive, warm-hearted, spontaneous, sociable, and not by any means, or of necessity, weak-minded or vicious. " Dr. DeanClake says: "The word mediumship, as understood and used byspiritualists, technically speaking, means a susceptibility to theinfluence, and more or less control, of decarnated spirits. Physiologically, it means a peculiar nervous susceptibility to what maybe termed the 'psychic force, ' which spirits use to move the mind orbody or both, of their mortal instrument. Psychologically, it signifiesa passive or negative state of mind and body which renders a personsubject to the positive will-power of spirits who influence him or her. "The spirit control who employed the hand of Stainton Moses, M. A. , towrite his thoughts, said: "The mediumistic peculiarity is one of spiritsolely, and not of body, seeing that it occurs in all varieties ofphysical frames, in the male and in the female; in the magnetic and inthe electric; in the stout and robust as well as in the puny and thin ofbody; in the old and in the young; in all conditions and under allcircumstances. This alone would lead you to see that it is not aphysical matter; and that conclusion is strengthened for you by the factthat the gift is perpetuated even after death of the earth body. Thosewho on your earth have been mediums retain the gift and use it with us. They are the most frequent visitors to your world; they communicate mostreadily; and it is through them that spirits who have not the gift areenabled to communicate with your earth. "

Mediumistic Sensitivity. 

Emma Hardinge Britten said: "Whatever that force may be whichconstitutes the difference between a 'medium' and a non-medium, it iscertainly of a mental and magnetic character--that is, a combination ofthe subtle elements of mind and magnetism, and therefore of apsychological and not of a purely physical character. Whilst thespiritualists of this generation have had no one to teach them eitherwhat spiritual gifts are, or how to use, or how to abuse them, experience has shown that the conditions under which spiritual phenomenaare produced through mediums are not only helped or hindered by theirmental states, but also by the will, magnetism, and mental states ofthose who surround them. " E. W. Wallis says: "The same laws govern therelations between the sensitive and the spirit operator as between thehypnotist and his subject. Therefore, mediumship is not necessarilyspiritual; it may be of all kinds; there may be psychical relationshipof a high grade and of a low one. There may be messages from beyond thatprove the identity of spirits, and give evidence of the continuity oflife, of the survival of mind, and yet they may not minister tospiritual growth, nor awaken any exalted desire to be of service to Godand man. There may be psychical sympathy and not spiritual fellowship;there may be spirit intercourse and not that sweet spiritual communionwhich should be the goal of all who seek for evidences of life beyondthe valley of death. It is no longer possible to regard mediumship as asupernatural endowment. It is, as regards the psychic susceptibilityupon which it depends, the common property of the race, and is thereforeas natural as are the 'gifts' of song or oratory, or the ability topaint or construct. But as certain gifts and graces are more developedin some individuals than in others, in like manner the sensitivenesswhich is called mediumship is more highly developed (or is capable ofsuch development) in certain peculiarly constituted persons who may beregarded as supernormally gifted, yet as naturally so as are geniuses inother directions. "

The Higher Vibratory Forces. 

The student who has carefully read what we have said in the earlierportions of the present book regarding the subject of Nature's FinerForces, and those concerned with "vibrations, " and "planes of being, "will be able to harmonize the apparently somewhat conflicting opinionsof those authorities above quoted concerning the nature of mediumshipand spirit communication. In the first place, the student will rememberthat there exist planes of being higher and other than our ownearth-plane, and that the rate of normal vibration on such planes ismuch higher than are those upon our own earth-plane. In the secondplace, he will remember that beings dwelling and manifesting on thesehigher planes are able to communicate only by means of their highervibratory rate of manifestation. And, in the third place, he willremember that a person dwelling on the earth-plane will not ordinarilyregister and interpret these higher vibrations of communication; andthat it is necessary for such a person to have originally, or else havedeveloped, the capacity to raise his or her own vibrations to the keynecessary to "catch" these higher vibrations. In short, we have hereonce more another instance of that "attunement" between sender andreceiver the most common instance of which is the wireless telegraph. 

Psychic Attunement. 

The entity, or spirit, dwelling on one of the many higher planes ofbeing who wishes to communicate with persons on earth through a medium, must first select some person capable of raising his or her ownvibratory rate of consciousness to become "in tune" with that of thespirit himself. Then he must learn to project his own mental vibrationswith sufficient intensity and force to be "caught" by the sensitiveperceptive organism of the medium. These things are beyond theunderstanding and accomplishment of many decarnate spirits, and unlessthey are taught by some one on their own plane of existence they arelikely to fail in their attempts to communicate through a medium on theearth-plane. But at the present time, in view of the great interestbeing manifested "over there" in the communication with the earth-plane, an earnest, persevering spirit will usually have comparatively littledifficulty in finding a proper instructor, and in acquiring the art of"earth-plane communication, " as it is called on the spirit plane. 

The Development of Mediumship. 

As regards the acquirement of mediumship qualities, information andscientific instruction is much needed, particularly at the present time. In this book we shall endeavor to throw much light upon this particularmatter, and to give such instruction and information in a plain, practical form. We may begin by reminding the candidate for mediumshipthat the methods of development of mediumship are entirely differentfrom those designed to develop ordinary psychic powers. In the case ofdevelopment for ordinary psychic power, the person must acquire thepower of concentration in the direction of sensing in his innerconsciousness the impressions coming to him from the outside world, suchimpressions not being consciously directed to him. He must be able to soconcentrate that he will be keenly sensitive to these impressions, andto interpret them intelligently. On the contrary, the person wishing todevelop the power of mediumship must learn to develop the power ofnegative receptivity to the vibrations coming from the spirit planes. Ashas well been said, he is the acted upon, and not the actor. While herequires concentration, patience, and perseverance in developing thepower to raise himself to the proper vibratory key, when the actual workof communication begins he must passively allow himself to speak andact, more or less unconsciously, under the guidance, direction, andcontrol of the communicating spirit. 

Unconscious Mediumship. 

The student will do well, however, to remember that as a popular writerhas said: "It must not, however, be supposed that spirit influence islimited to, and exerted solely upon, those who are known to be mediums;or that the spirits do not assist those who use their own psychicfaculties. It is probable that all people who are psychically sensitiveand open to impressions are indebted to spirit helpers, whether they areconscious of the fact or not. There is undoubtedly a greater degree ofinflux from the spirit side than even spiritualists are aware. Manypersons are indebted to spirit friends for spontaneous impulses, which, while those persons act upon them and reap the consequences, they canneither explain nor trace to their source. Spirits frequently associatewith and serve their earth friends, although the recipients of theirbenefactions are unaware of the fact. There would be very much more ofthis kind of guidance from the unseen, if, instead of being frightened, or repellant in their mental attitude toward the spirits, the great bulkof people were prepared to accept such assistance from the other side asperfectly natural and to be expected. "

Mediumship and Individuality. 

The student will find it desirable to acquaint himself with the bestopinions concerning the possible or probable effects of the practice ofmediumistic powers upon the medium himself. There is evidenced adisposition in certain quarters to hold to the idea that mediumship, orcontrol by spirits, is more or less injurious, mentally or physically orboth, to the medium. It is also frequently asserted that the mediumtends to lose his individuality and personal strength of character. Again, there are some who would teach that the medium should be of a loworder of intelligence, and should beware of exercising his intellect, the idea seeming to be that under these conditions the mental path willbe freer and clearer for the spirit control. All of the aforesaidnotions are erroneous, as will appear as we progress in the statementsin this book concerning true and efficient mediumship. 

Co-operation of Medium and Spirits. 

The medium who observes certain simple and plain rules and habits ofconduct will not suffer any loss of strength of character orindividuality from his exercise of his mediumistic power; on thecontrary, an intelligent exercise of the power of mediumship often tendsto develop the intellectual power of the medium. As to the idea that themedium must be ignorant, we have but to call your attention to the factthat many of the most efficient mediums are intelligent, and evenbrilliant individuals. As a writer has said: "There may be some mediumswho are ignoramuses, but it is doubtful if there will be any greatdegree of intelligence or great spiritual illumination presented throughtheir agency. It is possible that some mediums act foolishly when intheir normal state, for the purpose of accentuating the differencebetween their ordinary and supernormal conditions of mental activity;but there is a more rational, intelligent, and, indeed, a more spiritualconception of the relations which should exist between mediums and theirspirit guides, which is rapidly finding favor with thoughtful mediumsand spiritualists alike. The proper method of communing with the spiritsof the unseen realm is conducive to good, and not evil, to the medium. The co-operative association of medium and spirit on the plane ofthought and purpose, emotion and motive, ethics and inspiration, resultsin the education and elevation of the medium. "

Mediumship Not Dangerous. 

The following additional quotations from spiritualistic writers on thispoint, serve to throw important light on this subject. J. J. Morse says:"Andrew Jackson Davis, Hudson Tuttle, and other writers, if I correctlyunderstand them, claim that mediumship is a constitutional condition, and depends upon nervous adaptation, i. E. , 'sensitiveness' and thequickening of the subjective (psychical) faculties; and, personally, myown firm conviction is that there is nothing dangerous in mediumship. The mere dabbling in mediumship, as either the means of a new sensation, or for the gratification of personal vanity, is to be thoroughlydeprecated, as a perversion of some of the most wonderful possibilitiesof our natures; while the prosecution of mediumship, or anything else, to the detriment of mind, nerves, or health, in any direction, is a sinagainst oneself, and will inevitably call down the resultant penaltiesof physical and mental deterioration. I have many times advisedinquirers who wished to know how to develop mediumship, unless theydesired to do so for serious use, and within proper limits, not to seekits development at all. And in cases where I could see it would provepersonally detrimental, I have strongly advised the inquirer to let thematter entirely alone. "

Wallis says: "Very much depends upon the objects entertained by themedium and the sitters, as also upon the character and intentions of thespirit who seeks to manifest his presence; but, on general lines, wherepeople of average intelligence and rectitude seek communion with thosethey have known and esteemed, or loved, the results are almostinvariably beneficial. There is every reason why this should be so ifthe common-sense precautions are observed of keeping a level head, exercising patience, exhibiting unselfishness and sincerity, anddesiring good spiritual counsel and fellowship. "

A. Morton says: "Elevated spirits do not require mediums to surrendertheir reason; on the contrary, they advise that every new thought shouldbe tested in the crucible of reason, and that it be rejected if not inaccordance therewith; but the control of domineering spirits, claimingthe name of celebrities, who present unreasonable theories, and in adictatorial 'thus saith the spirit' manner, demanding unquestioningcompliance with their commands, must be rejected by all mediums asdebasing and inconsistent with self respect. Any associations orconcessions which have a tendency to lower the spiritual standard mustbe carefully avoided, for there is no growth in any relations which canonly be maintained by the sacrifice of self-respect and self-justice. "

Rational Mediumship. 

Wallis says: "The rational course for mediums and inquirers to follow isassuredly that of avoiding the extremes alike of credulity and scepticalincredulity, by letting the spirits do their best and then collating thefacts observed and drawing conclusions. Care, patience, and perseverancewill save both mediums and inquirers from many misconceptions and enablethem to avoid the errors of others. Above all, mediums should observetheir own feelings, study their own experiences, try to understand andco-operate with the spirits, but never yield servile or slavish service, nor permit themselves to be swayed by flattery nor dominated by anyspirit (in the circle or on the spirit side) who claims obedience, posesas an 'authority, ' or refuses to recognize the rights of others. Nomedium should remain ignorant, or refrain from giving effect to his (orher) natural desire for knowledge and self-improvement under theerroneous idea that he does not need to think, study, or learn, becausehe is a medium; and that the spirits will provide and teach through himall that is required. On the other hand, while thoughtfully observant offavorable conditions, and intelligent in self-study and culture, themedium should avoid 'getting up' certain subjects, or thinking alongcertain lines with the purpose and expectation that such informationwill be employed while under control. Such action, proceeding from awrong motive, cannot fail to injure the psychic relations between thespirit and the medium, and will render the work of control doubly hard, because such thoughts will have to be cleared away before those of thespirit can be transferred to, and have free course through, the medium. "

The "Home Circle. "

Mediums are born or made. That is to say, many persons are born with thegift of mediumship, while others, lacking this natural power, are ableto develop the power by practice and gradual unfoldment. Some of theworld's best mediums have been developed, while others in the same classhave been born with the gift. At the same time, it must be rememberedthat there is a wide range of power existing between differentindividual mediums of both of these classes. In the opinion of thepresent writer, perhaps the very best way of developing mediumisticpowers is that of actually participating in "circle work. " The wonderfulresults of earlier spiritualism in America and in Europe wereundoubtedly due to the casual and general practice of holding "homecircles. " These home circles were the nursery of some of the world'sgreatest mediums. Here the born medium was made aware of his or hernatural powers; and, likewise, here others were enabled to graduallyunfold and develop their latent mediumistic power. 

The Cure for Fraudulent Mediumship. 

At the present time we have too few mediums, and this fact isattributable largely to the gradual discontinuance of the home circles. Present time folks are too fond of having everything worked out andpresented to them, and they flock to the sensational publicdemonstrations, some of which are undoubtedly "faked" in order to meetthe public demand for sensational features; and at the same time thehonest, careful, conscientious mediums are often overlooked, and thehome circles almost unknown. Many so-called investigators ofspiritualism are feverishly anxious to "see something, " and areimpatient and the comparatively slow order of developments at the homecircle or at the careful mediumistic circles. Many earnest spiritualistslament the present tendency, and predict that in time there will be analmost complete dearth of honest, careful mediums, owing to the demandfor "quick action" and the temptation to furnish fraudulent counterfeitsof the genuine phenomena resulting from this feverish public demand. 

Warning to Young Mediums. 

Wallis says concerning this point: "After a time, as the developmentprogresses, the medium and his spirit friends may be strong enough toundertake public work without the assistance and protection of a circle, in the same manner as did D. Home, Slade, Eglinton, and other notedpublic mediums; but they should be in no hurry about doing so, and theyneed to be very self-possessed and level-headed to hold their ownagainst the 'phenomena hunters' on the one side (who sap the very lifeof the sensitive), and the know-all, conceited sceptics on the otherside (who freeze up all the psychic conditions), and before whom it isworse than foolish to cast these pearls of great price. 

"The lot of the public 'physical, ' 'test, ' and 'clairvoyant' medium isnot to be envied or lightly chosen. Such sensitives frequently suffer amartyrdom that none but sensitives can realize. What with foolishflatterers; the sitters who are never content, but cry 'give, give, give;' the injudicious friends, who seeing the exhaustion of theworn-out mediums, in mistaken sympathy urge them to take stimulants(instead of securing them rest and change of surroundings), they have ahard road to travel, and our sincerest sympathy goes out to them all. Weplead for them. We bespeak kindly and human consideration. Toofrequently they are tried and condemned unheard. They are expected toprove that they are NOT frauds, instead of, as in other cases, beingaccepted as reputable people. So much has this been the case that somemediums of unquestioned power have retired into private life andbusiness pursuits, where they meet with the respect and recognitionwhich were denied them while they were public workers in the ranks ofspiritualism. 

"Let us not be misunderstood. In saying this we are not apologizing for, or palliating fraud or wrong doing, but merely asking for fair andconsiderate treatment--not hasty, unreasoning condemnation. While it istrue that mediumship has many compensations, and the medium who takespleasure in his work has many pleasant experiences, it is also true thatthe professional medium is too frequently subjected to treatment whichmakes his task more difficult and thankless than it need be. The kindlyand appreciative treatment which he receives from some sitters is awelcome stimulus, and affords good conditions for the spirits, who arethus enabled to operate to the best advantage. "

PART VII

MEDIUMISTIC CONDITIONS

Mediumistic phenomena, i. E. , the phenomena by and through which spiritsmanifest their presence and demonstrate their power, may be broadlyclassified under two heads, as follows, (1) physical phenomena, and (2)mental phenomena. 

Physical Phenomena. 

PHYSICAL PHENOMENA cover a wide range of mediumistic manifestations, among which are movements of tables, the production of "raps, " themanifestation of spirit lights, freedom from the effects of fire, thepassage of matter through matter, direct writing upon paper or uponslates, direct voices, levitation of the medium, spirit photographs, andthe production of the materialized form of the spirit. While in rarecases the spirits may manifest these forms of physical phenomena withoutthe assistance of the medium and the circle, nevertheless as a rule suchphenomena are produced by the spirits only through the assistance of amedium, and usually only when there is gathered together a circle. 

"Psychic Force. "

Various explanations of the power employed by the spirits, assisted bythe medium and by the circle, have been offered by the scientificinvestigators of the subject. The most generally accepted theory of thewestern scientists is that the spirits employ what is called the"psychic force" of the medium, often assisted by that drawn from thecircle and focused in the medium. The medium is regarded as a psychicstorage battery which is freely drawn upon by the manifesting spirit. The degree and character of the manifestations are determined largely bythe peculiar quality of the psychic force, the capabilities of themedium, the knowledge and powers of the spirits, and the influence ofthe sitters. 

Human Magnetism. 

Dr. Dean Clarke says: "Human magnetism, or nerve aura, is probably themost sublimated form of ethereal matter, hence nearest in refinement tospirit substance, and therefore spirits use it as the vehicle of theirvibrating forces. Those persons who have an excess of magnetism, of theproper quality to unite with both the psychic force of spirits and theforces inherent in natural objects, and thus form an electro-magneticconnection of spirits with the objects they wish to act upon, are thepersons chosen by the spirits for physical mediums. The mind and brainof the medium are not often nor necessarily controlled, and only hismagnetism and psychic forces are used, through which the spiritstransmit the vibrations of their own power to mechanically produceconcussions, or movements of material objects. "

"Zoether. "

Hudson Tuttle (writing under control) gives the following statement of aspirit concerning the manner in which physical phenomena are produced:"Zoether (psychic force) emanating from the medium charges the object tobe moved, and a band of spirits directs a current of their own zoethicemanation in the direction they desire the article to move, and itpasses along the current thus produced. The charging of the object bythe medium is necessary in order that it may be in a state of vibrationharmonious to the spirit current. If this current be directed againstthe table or other charged body, raps or concussions are produced, as apositive and negative relation exists between the spirits and themedium's zoether. One spirit alone cannot produce physicalmanifestations. If one purports to communicate, assistance will berendered by many others, who combine their influence. "

"Prana. "

The orientals account for physical mediumistic phenomena in a similarway, though their terms are different. Instead of speaking of zoether, or psychic force, they always employ the term "prana. " In the orientalphilosophies "prana" is explained as a subtle form of energy permeatingthe universe, but manifesting in a special form in the organism of thehuman being. This subtle force, or prana, is held to be capable of beingtransmitted from one organism to another, and is held to be theenergizing power by means of which many forms of occult or magicphenomena are produced. Prana is very much akin to the "human magnetism"of the western occultists, and the properties attributed to the latterare really those which the orientals for centuries past have held to beamong the essential properties of prana; so, at the last, there is foundto be a practical agreement here between the oriental and the westernschools of occultism, respectively, in spite of their differingterminology. 

Mental Phenomena. 

MENTAL PHENOMENA cover another wide range of mediumistic phenomena, among which may be mentioned the following, viz. , involuntary orautomatic writing and drawing, writing by means of the planchette or"ouija" board or similar mechanical aid to writing, clairvoyantperception of spirits, clairaudient hearing of spirit voices, propheticutterances of spirits, impersonating and inspirational control of themedium. Mediums are frequently so thoroughly "under the influence orcontrol, " especially in private circle seances, that they seem to havebeen transformed into another personality. Sometimes the medium throughwhich the spirit is manifesting will have his facial appearance changedso completely that persons present will recognize in the changedappearance the looks of the spirit as known when it was in earth life. 

The Value of Phenomena. 

The chief value of physical mediumistic manifestations is not, asgenerally supposed, that of affording entertainment or food for thoughtfor those witnessing them, but rather that of affording proof of thepossibility of spirit communication, particularly when spirit identityis established through the manifestation of the phenomena. A writersays of this class of phenomena: "A good psychographic medium willusually obtain writing between closed slates, which may be brought bythe investigator, who can insist upon their not leaving his sight, andnot even leaving his hand. We have obtained writing on paper that we hadpreviously marked, which was then covered by our own hand, and afriend's and was untouched by the medium. On another occasion, a slatewhich we had personally cleaned was laid on the floor (fully six feetfrom the medium) with a small piece of pencil under it (in broaddaylight), and on taking it up shortly afterwards there was foundwritten on the under side a long message of a private nature from adeceased friend, of whom we were not thinking. Such phenomena as theseare still good and impressive, they cannot be counterfeited under likeconditions, and even when no proof of identity is given in connectionwith the writings, they point so distinctly to the action of a discrete, disembodied intelligence as to compel the recognition of their spiritualorigin. The evidential utility of physical phenomena lies in their beinginimitable by fraud. Imitations can of course be made which mightsatisfy the credible and the gullible, but the conditions for testingthe phenomena we have specially referred to are so simple that norational investigator need be deceived; first, to be sure that theslate, paper, or panel to be used is perfectly blank; second, that itdoes not leave the hand of the inquirer, or if it does, that it ismarked in such a way that there can be no doubt of its identificationwhen it is returned to him; and thirdly (with paintings), to observe ifthe paint be wet, and note the time occupied in their production. "

Trance Condition Not Essential. 

Many persons are under the impression that it is necessary for a mediumto go into the trance condition in order to manifest physicalmediumistic phenomena, but such is not the case. While many mediums dolapse into the trance conditions at such time, it is equally true thatmany others do not do so. Some of the very best mediums produce some ofthe most striking manifestations while in a perfectly normal, wakingcondition. A writer says of a well-known medium: "She constantlyreceives evidences of the presence of her spirit friends while she isperfectly normal. We have heard rappings and witnessed movements ofphysical objects in her presence, while holding friendly conversationwith her, when we have been in a good light. Frequently, at meal times, the spirits announce their presence by raps, and respond to thesalutations and questions of their medium and other members of thefamily. "

Professor Loveland says: "Many of the best mediums in the world werenever entranced in the sense of being in an unconscious sleep. And it isdoubted whether that condition is desirable. The Fox girls, and most, ifnot all of the original rapping mediums, were never in the deep sleeptrance. It is not necessary for any of the physical manifestations, andthat includes a very large percentage of all the spirit phenomena. Therappings, tippings, movings, slate writings, automatic writings, paintings, telegraphing, voices, materializing, etc. , can all occurwithout the sleep trance, the reason for which is very apparent, as inthe production of such phenomena the spirits simply use the surplusradiated nerve-force of the medium. "

Scientific Reports on Phenomena. 

Sir William Crookes, in speaking of D. D. Home and Euspasia Paladino, said: "Most, if not all, of the occurrences with Euspasia seem to havetaken place when she was in a trance, and the more complete the trancethe more striking the phenomena. This was not always so with Home. Certainly the two most striking things I ever saw with him, the firetest and the visible forms, were to be observed while he was entranced, but it was not always easy to tell when he was in that state, for hespoke and moved about almost as if he were in his normal condition; thechief differences being that his actions were more deliberate, and hismanner and expressions more solemn, and he always spoke of himself inthe third person, as 'Dan. ' When he was not in a trance we frequentlyhad movements of objects in different parts of the room, with visiblehands carrying flowers about and playing the accordion. On one occasionI was asked by Home to look at the accordion as it was playing in thesemi-darkness beneath the table. I saw a delicate looking female handholding it by the handle, and the keys at the lower end rising andfalling as if fingers were playing on them, although I could not seethem. So lifelike was the hand that at first I said it was mysister-in-law's, but was assured by all present that both her hands wereon the table, a fact which I then verified for myself. "

Phenomena Without Darkness. 

"Home always refused to sit in the dark. He said that, with firmness andperseverance, the phenomena could be got just as well in the light, andeven if some of the things were not so strong, the evidence of one'seyesight was worth making same sacrifices for. In almost all the seancesI had with Home there was plenty of light to see all that occurred, andnot only to enable me to write down notes of what was taking place, butto read my notes without difficulty. Home was very anxious to leteveryone present be satisfied that he was not doing any of the thingshimself--too anxious, I sometimes thought, for frequently he wouldinterfere with the progress and development of what was going on byinsisting that some sceptic or other should come around and take hold ofhis hands and feet to be sure he was not doing anything himself. Attimes, he would push his chair back and move right away from the tablewhen things were moving on it, and ask those furthest from him to comeround and satisfy themselves that he had nothing to do with themovements. I used frequently to beg him to be quiet, knowing that, if hewould not move about in his eagerness to convince us of his genuineness, the strength of the phenomena would probably increase to such a degreethat no further evidence would be needed that their production wasbeyond the powers of the medium. 

Test Conditions. 

"During the whole of my knowledge of D. D. Home, extending for severalyears, I never once saw the slightest occurrence that would make mesuspicious that he was attempting to play tricks. He was scrupulouslysensitive on this point, and never felt hurt at anyone takingprecautions against deception. He sometimes, in the early days of ouracquaintance, used to say to me before a seance, 'Now, William, I wantyou to act as if I were a recognized conjurer, and was going to cheatyou and play all the tricks I could. Take every precaution you candevise against me, and move about and look under the table or where elseyou like. Don't consider my feelings. I shall not be offended. I knowthat the more carefully I am tested the more convinced will everyone bethat these abnormal occurrences are not of my own doings. ' Latterly, Iused jokingly to say to him, 'Let us sit round the fire and have a quietchat, and see if our friends are here and will do anything for us. Wewon't have any tests or precautions. ' On these occasions, when only myfamily were present with him, some of the most convincing phenomena tookplace. "

Is Darkness Necessary?

From the above it is seen that not only is the trance condition notabsolutely necessary for the production of striking mediumisticphenomena, but that, also, there is no absolute necessity for thecondition of darkness to be maintained as an essential feature of suchphenomena. While many mediums insist upon the condition of darkness atseances, it is thought by some careful thinkers that this arises fromthe fact that such mediums have been accustomed to such conditions fromtheir earliest days of mediumship, and have grown to believe that thesame are absolutely necessary. It is thought that if such mediums wouldbegin over again, practicing in full light in the company of a fewsympathetic friends, they would before long grow accustomed to the newconditions, and would then be able to reproduce all of their mostimportant phenomena in full light. Using the terms of modern psychology, it would seem that such mediums are the victims of their own"auto-suggestion, " and fixed beliefs; and, as all students of thesubject well know, the mental states of the medium have a most importantbearing of the quality of the phenomena produced, and form a veryimportant factor of the conditions governing the success of the seance. 

Developing Circles. 

The person who is developing mediumship will do well to surround himselfwith persons of a certain type of psychical power, and to form circlesof such persons. Such persons are invaluable in constituting a"developing circle. " Such persons need not be mediumistic themselves, nor are they required to actually do anything. Instead, their service isthat of being present as psychical reservoirs of force upon which thespirits can draw for manifesting power. The medium, being sensitive tohelpful influences, and the reverse, will recognize such persons by thecongenial and harmonious influence they exercise upon him; and he willdo well to encourage such persons to sit in his developing circles. 

Impersonating Mediumship. 

What is known as "impersonating mediumship" occurs where the medium isso completely under the control of the manifesting spirit that he willexhibit, often in a marvelously accurate manner, the personalcharacteristics and mannerisms of the spirit, and which are readilyrecognized as such by the spirit's surviving friends in earth-life. Sometimes the medium will actually re-enact the dying moments of thecontrolling spirit. In many cases such impersonations have been sonearly photographically and phonographically correct that they haveafforded the most convincing proof to investigators, and in other caseshave been a great consolation to relatives of the spirit who have beenthus assured that their loved one was still in actual existence on ahigher plane of being. These results, however, are possible only when avery close rapport condition has been established between the spirit andthe medium. In cases in which such a close rapport condition isobtained, and a high degree of harmony developed, the spirit will beable to positively establish his identity by causing the medium to utterhis exact words, and to give names, dates, and close details ofincidents occurring in his earth life, and often to employ his exact setphrases and verbal tricks of speech, so as to bring to the consciousnessof the sitters the realization that they are in the actual presence ofthe decarnate spirit friend. 

The Proper Mental Condition. 

The young medium, however, should beware against striving too hard to bethe instrument of the phenomena of spirit impersonation. For a toointense anxiety, and desire to please sitters, frequently tends toproduce a cloudy mental state in which the ideas in the mind of themedium blend with the spirit communication, and thus produces a mostunsatisfactory result, and one which is apt to confuse the minds of thesitters and sometimes actual arouse suspicion that the medium is tryingto practice deception. For this reason the young medium should not seekthe attendance of persons desiring "test seances;" at least, such shouldbe his course until he has learned not to be carried away with hisdesire to please or to satisfy such persons attending his circles. Heshould endeavor to cultivate a mental condition of calmness, and adetermination not to influence or to interfere with the spiritcommunications in any way whatsoever, but, instead, to allow himself tobecome a passive instrument for the communication. The medium shouldremember that he is not a dealer in merchandise "warranted to please, "but is, instead, a medium of communication between the spirit and thosestill in earth-life. 

Demand Proof of Spirit Identity. 

A certain degree of care and caution, and the employment of honestpowers of discrimination, is necessary on the part of the sitters incases of spirit impersonation. This not because of any lack of honestyon the part of the medium, but because of the habit of a mischievousclass of dwellers on the planes of spirit life to falsely impersonateother spirits as such seances. As all investigators of the subject knowvery well, it is not an infrequent thing for such mischievous andmeddlesome spirits to endeavor to pass themselves off as the relative orfriends of those in the circle, or even to falsely impersonate somegreat historical personages. In such cases the sitters should insistupon the spirit positively identifying himself, just as they would incase of doubt regarding a person speaking to them over the telephone andclaiming to be such-and-such a person. And the proof demanded should besimilar to that which would be sought from the suspected telephonetalker. An honest spirit communicator does not object to such demands, and is only too ready to do his best to furnish the right kind of proofsconcerning his identity. 

The "Trance Condition. "

The psychic condition frequently attending the demonstration ofmediumship powers is usually spoken of as a "trance, " but this term isquite misleading, for it carries with it the suggestion of an entireloss of consciousness and of a condition of more or less deep sleep. Butthe mediumistic trance is seldom a deep sleep condition. Instead, it isthe condition similar to that of a profound "day dream, " in which theperson is fully awake but in which the consciousness has been almostentirely taken off the sights and sounds of the outside world. As awriter has well said: "What is called 'trance mediumship' is seldom ofthe nature of the deep sleep of entire unconsciousness. It is morefrequently the suspension of the ordinary consciousness of externalsurroundings, a temporary oblivion on the outer plane--a semi-consciousstate, in fact--in which the subject does not retain the volitionalability to employ his thinking powers, the latter having been 'switchedoff, ' so to speak, and the subject responds to the will of the spiritcontrol. "

Spirit Inspiration. 

Wallis says, concerning the nature of a certain phase of spirit control:"In the case of speaking mediumship, where general and philosophicalideas are to be transmitted, the control is of a different order fromthat exercised for test manifestations. It is more frequently of thenature of 'suggestion. ' The spirit suggestionist suggests to the mediuma certain train of ideas, and then stimulates the brain and the organsof expression to do the work of dressing up the thoughts and giving themutterance. Unless the subject is a scientific or a biographical one, inwhich specific terms are required and accurate data are to be imparted, the relationship between the 'inspired' speaker and the spirit controlpartakes more of the character of the engineer who feeds the fire anddirects the movements of his engine, while the machine does the work, than it does of the actual voicing of the exact words, embodying in afull and complete fashion the ideas the spirit wishes to have expressed. 

Spirit Suggestion. 

"At first the operator may succeed by very imperfectly stimulating thebrain of the sensitive and causing the cerebration and expression of histhoughts. The utterances may bear but a slight resemblance to what thespirit intended to express. The vocabulary is that of the medium, andthe form in which the speech is cast of necessity partakes of the moldfamiliar to the sensitive--but, by continued close association andfrequent control of the medium, the operator gains experience whichenables him to exert a more decided influence; and the sensitive, becoming attuned, responds to and expresses the thoughts of the spiritwith greater clearness and precision. Just as those who dwell togetherunconsciously approach nearer to each other and acquire a similarity intheir mode of thought and of expressing their ideas (the more dominantpersonality impressing itself upon the less positive), so the mediumimperceptibly, and very often unconsciously, acquires facility andproficiency in thought and elocutionary expression as the result of theco-operation between himself and his spirit guide. "

Psychic Attunement. 

Those who have read the above carefully stated opinion, will begin tosee the reason why certain mediums who have attained the greatestproficiency in certain forms of mediumship, and who have become what areknown as "reliable mediums, " almost always have some particular spiritguide or guides with whom they have become in almost perfect psychicharmony and attunement. These harmonious spirits are not only enabled toexpress themselves with a high degree of clearness and power throughtheir favorite medium, but are also enabled to assist in the productionof the best rapport conditions between other spirits wishing tocommunicate and the said medium. There is a certain amount of spiritualand psychic co-operation between spirit and medium which is attainedonly by practice and continued association, which results in a psychicattunement between them. The closer and more harmonious the relationshipexisting between a spirit and his medium, the thinner is the veilseparating the two planes upon which they dwell. 

Automatic Writing. 

In that phase of mediumship known as "automatic or inspirationalwriting, " there is manifested two distinct forms of spirit control ofthe organism of the medium. In cases of pure automatic writing thespirit controls the arm and hand muscles of the medium, and uses them towrite out the message under the direct and absolute control of the mindand will of the spirit. Cases have been known in which both hands of themedium have been so used by the spirit control, each hand writing adistinct and separate message, and both being performed without anyconsciousness of the nature of the message on the part of the medium. Insome cases of automatic writing the medium was engaged in thought aboutother subjects, or even in reading or study from a book. This is truenot only in cases of automatic writing in which the hand is directlyemployed, but also in those in which some mechanical device such as theplanchette or the ouija board intervenes. 

Inspirational Writing. 

In inspirational writing, on the other hand, the spirit impresses themessage upon the mind of the medium, either as a whole, or else sentenceby sentence or even word by word--in all of such cases, be it noted, themedium is aware of the substance of what he is about to write, eitherthe word, the sentence, or perhaps the entire message. In such cases, ofcourse, the medium retains control of his writing muscles and theiraction, and the spirit control is merely a phase of higher telepathy, asit were. When the message is impressed upon the mind of the medium wordby word, or sentence by sentence, the style is of course that of thespirit exerting the control; but where the entire message is impressedupon the mind of the medium, the style is usually a blending of that ofthe spirit and that of the medium, for the medium is not likely toremember the literal message as given him, but merely is conscious ofthe general purport and meaning thereof, together with a few phrases orexpressions formed by the spirit mind. In such cases, of course, thepersonality of the medium enters largely into the message, while in thecase of pure automatic writing the personality of the medium plays nopart whatsoever, and the personality of the spirit is present in itsentirety. This important distinction should be noted and remembered. 

Gradual Development of Powers. 

Most mediums develop their powers of mediumship gradually, and passthrough a number of stages in their development of power. At firstthey may obtain only raps, or possibly the tilting or movement oftables. Then, very likely, they are moved to write, eitherautomatically or else inspirationally. Later they experience theimpulse to allow the spirit control to speak through their vocalorganism, but it is seldom that the spirit is able to do this at firsttrial, as the medium is not as yet sufficiently sensitized or attunedto the spirit, and, instead, they can but gurgle, gasp, and makeinarticulate sounds, or else shout, laugh, cry, or sing, and possiblyjabber some strange jargon or unknown tongue, or else simply utter aseries of sounds lacking in definite meaning. Later, the inarticulatesound is succeeded by definite sentences--perhaps a message, or ashort address. Sometimes the spirit control will endeavor to relatesome of his earth-life experiences, or perhaps even to give animpersonation manifestation. Often several different spirits strive tomanifest through the developing medium, taking turns as manifestation, holding the control for only a few minutes and then giving place tohis successor. 

Spirit Guides. 

As the development proceeds, it will be found that one or two particularspirits will manifest a greater power than the others, and afterestablishing a strong degree of harmony and attunement they will assumethe position of "guides" to the medium, and will accordingly begin towork in his interests on their side of life, and to accept or rejectother spirits who seek to manifest through their medium. At this stage, the medium is often sufficiently advanced to be used as the channel forfuller and more complete manifestations, particularly in the directionof inspirational speaking. Often the medium in this stage of developmentis also able to manifest psychic powers which were formerly beyond hisability, as for instance psychometry, clairvoyance, etc. Then if hisspirit guides be sufficiently advanced and powerful, and the medium besufficiently receptive and harmonious to their influences, they willeducate him to such an extent that he will be able, with theirassistance, to become an instrument for the production of still higherforms of mediumistic phenomena. But the development is almost alwaysgradual and proceeds by successive and well-defined steps and stages. 

No Loss of Individuality. 

In concluding this part of our book, we would call your attention to thefollowing statements made by writers along the lines of spiritualism inthe leading journals of that school of modern thought. The first writersays: "There is no need for the medium to decline to be influenced orcontrolled, by spirit friends for fear of losing his 'individuality, 'any more than he should insist upon asserting his freedom and refuse theaid of tutors, lest they should infringe upon his sacred'individuality. ' What are called the unconscious phases of mediumshipgenerally lead up to loving co-operation with the wise and kindly soulsof the higher life in efforts to establish the fellowship of man; tobring knowledge where ignorance now reigns; to banish the darkness bythe light of that spiritual communion which shall yet be a blessing tothe race; and reliance upon higher powers in or out of the body does notmean that we sacrifice our own abilities, nor do we thus become exemptfrom responsibility. Quite the reverse. It is the arrogance ofindividualism against which we protest. In fact, there is no abidingstrength of purpose apart from the dependence every well-ordered mindshould accord to the Infinite Light and Wisdom and the beneficialservices which His wise and loving ministering spirits can render to usif we are desirous and responsive. "

Mediumship Beneficial. 

A second writer says: "There is no reason why the reactive consequencesof frequent control by enlightened and earnest spirits, even in the caseof the 'trance' medium, should not prove extremely beneficial to thesensitive, and this, we believe, has been the case with many of thespeakers in the spiritualistic movement. Where the medium isinspirational and ready to respond to the thought impulsations of thecontrol, it stands to reason that the transmitted ideas, and thestimulation of the thought-faculties caused by the transference andexpression of the spirits' opinions, will not be lost to the medium. 'Ifyou will take one step we can more easily help you to take a second thanwe could compel you to take the first if you were unprepared, ' said aspirit teacher to Mrs. Emma Hardinge Britten, and there need be no lossof dignity or individuality, no injury to body or mind, but a gain ofstrength and spiritual vigor, education of mind and stimulation of moralpurpose, by intelligent co-operation and temporary surrender on thepart of the medium to wise and loving spirit helpers and teachers. "

Mediumship and The Bible. 

A third writer, Rev. H. E. Haweis, says in connection with the relationof spiritualism with religion: "People now believe in the Bible becauseof spiritualism; they do not believe in spiritualism because of theBible. Take up your Bible and you will find that there is not a singlephenomenon which is recorded there which does not occur at seancestoday. Whether it be lights, sounds, the shaking of the house, thecoming through closed doors, the mighty rushing winds, levitation, automatic writing, the speaking in tongues, we are acquainted with allthese phenomena; they occur every day in London as well as in the Actsof the Apostles. It is incontestable that such things do occur, that inthe main the phenomena of spiritualism are reliable, and happen over andover again, under test conditions, in the presence of witnesses; andthat similar phenomena are recorded in the Bible, which is written forour learning. It is not an opinion, not a theory, but a fact. There ischapter and verse for it, and this is what has rehabilitated the Bible. The clergy ought to be very grateful to spiritualism for this, for theycould not have done it themselves. They tried, but they failed. "

PART VIII

HOW TO DEVELOP MEDIUMSHIP

Anyone is entitled to be considered a "medium" if he or she ispsychically sensitive and capable of receiving and responding to spiritcontrol or influence. Likewise, anyone is entitled to the designationwho is capable of so generating freely a sufficient quantity of "psychicforce, " magnetism, prana, or whatever other name we may choose to applyto the force which is generated in the human organism and is capable ofbeing employed by the spirits in order to produce mediumistic phenomenaof the class usually referred to as "physical phenomena. " As we haveseen, the spirits themselves are not usually able to manufacture orgenerate by themselves this psychic required to produce the saidphenomena, but, on the contrary, must depend upon mediumisticindividuals for such force. 

Who Are Mediumistic?

Many persons are more or less naturally sensitive to spirit influence, and therefore mediumistic. In many cases these persons tend to take onthe psychic conditions of others, both those in earth life and those onthe spirit plane of existence, without realizing the nature of theinfluence operating on them. Such persons are frequently more or lesserratic, and are considered as "flighty" by their friends. They needinstruction on the subject of psychic laws and self-control, so thatthey may intelligently guard themselves against undesirable influences, and at the same time cultivate the power of mediumship of the desirablekind. It has been asserted that "everyone is a medium, " and in a waythis is true, for practically every person is more or less sensitive tospirit influence, and is capable of being developed into an efficientmedium of communication with the spirit world. But it is equally truethat only a certain percentage of persons possess the true spiritualqualities requisite for the highest phases of true mediumship. That isto say, but few persons are fitted temperamentally and spiritually forthe higher tasks of mediumship. We think it safe to say, however, thatwhere a person is filled with a burning desire to become a true medium, and feels within himself or herself a craving of the soul fordevelopment along these lines, then that person may feel assured that heor she has within his or her soul the basic qualities required for truemediumship, and that these may be developed by the proper methods. 

The Mediumistic Temperament. 

A leading writer on the subject of mediumship has said: "It is afundamental proposition that sensitiveness, or the capability ofmediumship, is a faculty common to mankind, differing in degree--ashearing and sight are common heritages, but keener in some individualsthan in others; or, under certain conditions, it may disappear. " Whatis called "the mediumistic temperament" is frequently markedself-consciousness and shrinking from public criticism, and a diffidencewhich causes the person to wish to be out of the range of theobservation of strangers and those not sympathetic to them; on the otherhand, however, there are other forms of the "mediumship temperament"which is marked by a nervous, almost hysterical, self assertiveness anddesire for public notice and attention. Persons of either of thesephases of this temperament, however, have the common quality of beingextremely sensitive to sneers and slights, adverse criticism andoppositions, while ridicule drives them almost beside themselves. Likewise they are nearly always found to be enthusiastic and earnestworkers when their interests and sympathies are aroused; as a writer hassaid "they are almost invariably emotional, enthusiastic, spontaneous, and ardent. " And, as another writer has said they are usually "generousand impulsive, hot-headed and independent, close friends with warmhearts; too sensitive to criticism of an unkind nature, too easilypleased by praise; without malice, without revengeful thoughts. " Astriking feature of this temperament may be summed up in the phrase, "hungry for sympathy and understanding. "

Is Mediumship Desirable?

While it is true that a vast majority of persons possess the mediumisticpower, latent and dormant, and capable of being developed to a greateror less active power, it is but honest to say that in many cases it is agrave question whether the person would be justified in undertaking thehard work, and long time, required to develop himself for the minorsuccess which would attend his efforts. As a writer has said: "Does theprospective result justify the labor involved to bring these powers intoefflorescence? My impression is, that in at least three cases out offour, the time and labor it would take to develop this latent quality toits greatest efficacy would be far in excess of its value when sodeveloped. " But, as we have already said, the best indication is foundin the "call" to develop his or her latent powers which the true mediumalways experiences. 

Developing the Natural Power. 

A writer on this subject well says: "Just as a drum or tamborine isincapable of being made to emit a tithe of what can be produced by meansof a piano or a violin, in the way of music, so the differences inquality and conditions of the physical organisms, and in the degree ofnervous and psychical sensibility of those who desire mediumship, renderit improbable that any but a small proportion will develop such extremesusceptibility to spirit influence as will repay them for the time andself-sacrifice involved in the cultivation of their powers. Further, itshould be borne in mind that while wise spirits are ever ready torespond to the call of the earnest aspirant for spiritual truth, as wisespirits they are not likely to devote themselves to the preparation ofan instrument that would be inefficient for their purpose. The nervoussystem of the medium, whatever his phase may be, has to be trained torespond to the will and the psychic force of the controlling spirit, just as much as the muscles of the musician or artist, and 'practicemakes perfect' in the one case as well in the other. Since mediumshipis a strictly natural qualification, depending upon organic fitness andsusceptibility, it is not a supernatural power or a special 'gift, 'neither does it insure the moral purity nor the intellectual ability ofthe medium, any more than musical or artistic capabilities are evidencesof the special intelligence or the high moral tones of theirpossessors. "

Mediumship and Genius. 

The spirits controlling the hand of a celebrated writing medium, oncedelivered through him the following message regarding the nature anddevelopment of mediumistic powers: "Mediumship is a development of thatwhich is, in another sort, genius. Genius, the opened and attentive earto spirit guidance and inspiration, shades away into mediumship, thefacile instrument of spirit manifestation. In proportion as the mediumbecomes open to influence, directly exercised, is he valuable as a meanswhereby direct messages are conveyed. And in proportion as theindividual spirit is lost and merged in the great ocean of spirit, isthe result most direct and serviceable. It is when the passive spirit iscontent to allow us to use the corporeal instrument, as it does whenitself operates, that we gain satisfactory results. That can only bewhen a condition of perfect passivity, as far removed from scepticism asfrom credulity, has been secured. This opening of the spiritual being tospiritual influences is what you call mediumship. The true and valuablegifts are purely spiritual and must be used for spiritual purposes; notfor gain, or for satisfying curiosity, or for base or unworthy ends. "

Spontaneous Mediumship. 

What may be called "spontaneous mediumship" is experienced by manypersons not claiming mediumistic powers, and not understanding thenature of the phenomena manifesting to and through themselves. Suchpersons at times are conscious of the presence of spirit friends, andmay even catch glimpses of them either in the form of a mental imageimpressed upon their minds by the spirit friends, or else by a more orless clear partial materialization. Sometimes raps manifest themselvesin their vicinity, and tables and light articles of furniture maymanifest movement at their touch or approach. Such persons, notunderstanding the laws of spirit manifestation, are frequently greatlydistressed, or even frightened, by such manifestations; and in not a fewcases they experience considerable annoyance and grief by reason of theattitude of their friends who are apt to consider them "queer, " or"spooky, " and therefore to be avoided. Moreover, in the case of thephysical manifestations such as the movements of tables, furniture, etc. , and the production of raps, these persons are frequently accusedof deliberate fraud in the production of such phenomena, whereas as amatter of fact they, themselves, are quite in the dark as to the causeand nature of the phenomena in question. It is obvious that the placingof the right information in the hands of such persons, and theirinstruction in the laws and principles of mediumship would be a blessingto them. 

Mediumistic Flashes. 

A writer has the following to say concerning this class of mediumisticpersons: "Those persons who are naturally sensitive sometimesexperience strange and sudden impulses. Thoughts come to them 'in aflash, ' so to speak. They say things spontaneously which they had notintended to say--the words seem to burst from them and 'say themselves. 'Others have equally sudden and fugitive clairvoyant experiences; theysee spirits where they least expect, and when they are absorbed insomething else; but when they strongly desire to 'see' or to receiveguidance, they get nothing. This state of affairs, in all probability, is due to the fact that their susceptibility is not sufficientlydeveloped; their psychical impressibility can only be reached and actedupon under specially favorable conditions, which are disturbed anddissipated when the ordinary intellectual self is aroused. 

Systematic Development. 

"The remedy will be found in the systematic cultivation of interiorrepose and confidence. The psychic must learn to regard it as aperfectly natural experience that the spiritual states and positivethoughts of excarnate people should impinge upon his spiritual sphere, and while 'attentive to the holy vision, ' should calmly accept the factand maintain the attitude or response; not anxiously nor demandingly, but thankfully enjoying the spiritual communion and illumination thusafforded to him. It is only natural that many people should desire tobecome mediums, and that they should wish to ascertain what constitutesmediumship, and what is required to secure its development. But thosewho express these desires should remember that in all probabilitiesmonths, if not years, of patient development have been necessary for thesuccess and efficiency of those celebrated mediums whom they admire andprobably envy. " But, as we have said before, if the "call" to mediumshipbe felt, then it may be heeded; though the person must be prepared topay the price of toil and work, patience and perseverance, required toattain the mountain top of mediumship. 

The Development Circle. 

As we have repeatedly stated in the foregoing pages, the actual spiritcircle is the best possible means of developing the latent powers ofmediumship, and the simplest, readiest, and most effective method ofdiscovering the presence of such latent powers in the individual. As aleading medium has told us, it is "the primary school for the study ofspiritual facts, and for the training of mediums. " The "spirit circle, "as most of you know, is a company of harmonious, earnest, sympatheticpersons joining their psychic powers for the purpose of aiding themedium to establish the lines of psychic communication between the earthplane and the planes of the spiritual world. It must here be stated thatby "development" we do not mean the cultivation of the powers of thespirits, but rather the training and unfoldment of the powers of themedium to receive and transmit the power exercised by the spiritcontrols. 

The Aspirational Attitude. 

To those who purpose to develop their latent mediumistic powers by andthrough the development circle, we would say that it is of the highestimportance that they should cultivate a trustful, hopeful mentalattitude, and a willingness to open themselves to the inflow of thespiritual power of their friends of the spiritual planes. As a writerhas said, they should "make some mental preparation, such as eliminatingfrom their minds all disturbing or irritating thoughts, and by strivingto consciously realize union of purpose with those who may havepreviously made their presence known or indicated their intention tohelp in the work of the development of their mediumistic powers, bymentally requesting that the spiritual ties may be strengthened. Evenwhere there has not been any clear indication of the presence of spirithelpers, a generally aspirational and receptive attitude of mind will domuch towards providing favorable conditions. "

Natural Unfoldment. 

Again, the person wishing to develop his latent mediumistic powers mustexercise patience and perseverance, and must not insist upon a prematureattempt at revelation on the part of the spirits. The process of theunfoldment of the mediumistic powers should be akin to that of theunfoldment of the bud of the flower, that is to say, it must be gradual, natural, and unforced. The writer above mentioned, says on this point:"Too many people, instead of waiting until the spirits were ready tocommunicate with them, have pressed for 'tests' before the connectionswere properly made. They have complicated matters by their eagerquestionings, and have worried the operators until everything wentwrong; and then, because the answers were incorrect, inconsequent andmisleading, or persistently negative, they declared that the spirit wasa deceiver, evil, or foolish, and, while having only themselves toblame, gave up the sittings in disgust, whereas, had they been lessimpetuous, less opinionated, less prejudiced, they would in allprobability have eventually obtained satisfactory proofs of the presenceof their spirit loved ones. "

Persistent Watchful Waiting. 

Some persons are so disappointed because they have not obtained resultsafter two or three sittings that they give up further efforts. It wouldperhaps amaze such persons to know that many of the world's mostcelebrated mediums have, in the beginning of their development circlework, sat for several weeks, or even several months, at frequentintervals, without obtaining more than the most meagre results; but theyafterwards developed the most marvelous power. An extreme case is citedin the history of spiritualism, in which a couple sat night after nightfor six months, without missing a sitting and without being rewarded bya single physical result; but after this tedious and discouraging wait, all at once, as it were, the spirits secured the most perfect kind ofcommunication through them, and difficult table tippings and levitation, convincing raps, messages, writings, and finally materializationsfollows, until their fame spread all over the world of spiritualism. 

Building Lines of Communication. 

Just how long it will require to obtain convincing results at thedevelopment circle is a matter largely dependent upon certainconditions. Much, of course, depends upon the faculty of the medium toadjust and harmonize himself with the spirits, so as to furnish a "clearwire" for them to operate over. Again, much depends upon the characterof the persons constituting the circle. A circle composed ofharmonious, helpful persons will do much to hasten the coming of themanifestation, whereas one composed of inharmonious, sceptical, impatient, and materialistic persons will do much to retard the progressand development of the mediumistic powers. 

Developing Concentration. 

The following advice on this particular subject will be found helpful tothose contemplating the formation of development circles, and theunfoldment of their latent powers of mediumship; it is from the pen ofan earnest student of this subject, and one who is himself a competentmedium. This person says: "One of the most important prerequisites forsuccess in the development of mediumship along spiritual lines is thecultivation of the power of concentration. In the early days of themovement the would-be medium was advised to be 'passive, ' and passivitywas often construed into self-effacement. We are now learning todistinguish between receptivity and docility, between apathy andaspiration. A medium is not, and should not be willing to become a mereirresponsible tool. For intelligent and beneficial association with, andinspiration from, the people of the higher life, a certain degree ofabstraction is necessary. To cut one's self off from ordinaryconditions, to retire into the sanctuary of one's own innerconsciousness, to 'enter the silence' as it is sometimes called, ishelpful training for the preparation of conditions favorable for themanifestation of spirit-power. The Quakers were true spiritualists inthis sense, and evidently realized the need for the concentration of thesoul's forces and their withdrawal from the outer plane, preparatory tothe descent of the spiritual influence that moved them to speak. 

The Call for Illumination. 

"The sincere supplication for illumination and guidance is never invain. The spirit breathes a serener air, and is calmed, strengthened, and comforted by the subsequent reaction. It is harmonized thereby, andthus becomes accordant to the psychic forces which, like the ocean'stides, ebb and flow throughout the universe, and bathe every soul thatlies open to their vivifying and quickening influence. Still more, thereare those who dwell in the Light, whose thoughts and love go out to allsuch as truly call upon God; and these, the ministering messengerspirits, often pour their libations of sympathy into the sad hearts ofthe sorrowful ones on earth, even though they remain unknown and theirinterposition is unrecognized by those to whom they have given theirloving and helpful thoughts. 

The Jacob's Ladder of Communion. 

"By the earnest study of the conditions requisite for the development ofbody, mind, and psychic sense, the intelligent medium will endeavor tomeet the friends who inspire him at least half way on the Jacob's ladderof communion, and to enter into reciprocal and conscious fellowship withthem on the thought plane, so that their inspirations may freely flowthrough his instrumentality to others, unobstructed by his personality. Classes for the development of mediumship along these lines are verymuch needed; classes in which the members are expected to take anactive part, not merely to sit and sit, and let the spirits do all thework, but by systematic preparation and spiritual aspiration andcultivated receptivity prepare themselves to become lucid and capableinstruments for the transmission of information and helpful influencesfrom the other side. 

The Attainment of Excellence. 

"There is but one course of procedure for the successful attainment ofexcellence in any field of labor or thought, and that is by study andtraining, by observation, by persevering application and determinedeffort, by readiness to learn, and responsiveness to every influencewhich will help to smooth the pathway to the desired success. Theintelligent medium who follows this course will not go blindly ongroping in the obscurity of the psychic realm, and becoming the tool forunseen and unknown agents, but he will unfold his powers, and byco-operating with them will learn to know and trust his preceptors, until he may possibly become as a spirit among spirits, the consciouspossessor of such knowledge regarding his own spiritual nature andpowers that he will be a ready instrument in the hands of enlightenedspirit people, with whom he can knowingly work for human good. "

What a Development Circle Is. 

Now then, with the above advice and admonitions in mind, the persons whodesire to develop and unfold their mediumistic powers will do well totake the necessary steps to form a development circle. The "circle" itmust be remembered, is not merely a crowd of persons gathered togetherfor the purpose of witnessing spiritualistic manifestations orphenomena. Instead, it is a gathering of persons who desire toco-operate in establishing relations with the world of spirits, and toreceive communications therefrom. In the case of the development circle, the purpose is to demonstrate that well established spiritualisticprinciple that the mediumistic faculty in all of its forms is bestdeveloped and unfolded, cultivated and strengthened, by an actualsitting in the circle, in such a way as to perfect and spiritualize themagnetism of the sitters by their mutual action on each other, and bythe influence and power of the spirits employing such magnetic andpsychic forces so furnished them by the circle of harmonious sitters. Or, as a writer has well expressed it: "The purpose for which a spiritcircle is held is that by the blending of the aura, psychic force, ormagnetic emanations of the sitters, the attention of disembodied spiritsmay be attracted and a battery be formed by means of which they cancommunicate with the circle. The focalization of this force rests withthe unseen operator, and if they are skilled in the 'modus operana, 'they know where, how, and in what way to use it to the best advantage. "

Forming the Development Circle. 

The circle should be composed of not less than four persons, and notmore than twelve. It is well to have an equal number of persons of eachsex, if this be possible; if not possible to obtain an equality of thesexes, the effort should be made to come as near to that equality as ispossible. The members of the circle should seat themselves around atable, and as nearly as is possible the sexes should be alternated inthis grouping, that is to say, a man should sit next to a woman, and soon. It will be found well to have the same persons regularly attend thecircles, so far as is possible. Likewise, it will be found advantageousto always use the same table, and to hold the circle in the sameroom--but these things are not absolutely essential, and very goodresults may often be obtained by having the members of the circle gatherat the different homes of its respective members. While cheerfulness iswell on the part of the sitters, there should be no indulgence in levityand joking during the sitting. The room should be comfortably warmed andlighted in the ordinary way. 

The Sitters in the Circle. 

The sitters will do well to occupy their same places at each sitting, unless the spirits indicate otherwise. The medium, or in the absence ofa recognized medium the most sensitive person in the circle, should sitin the circle at a place mentally recognized as the "head of the table, "even though the table be circular in form. It will be well for thesitters to hold each others' hands at the beginning of the circle, inorder to generate the necessary magnetism. But after the circle isactually formed, the sitters should place their hands on the top of thetable, close to its edge; the small fingers of the hands of each sittertouching those of the sitter on either side of him--in this way there isa psychic and magnetic battery formed of the sitters, providing perfectconnection is maintained. 

The Spirit Communication Code. 

At the beginning, the leader should plainly announce the signallingconditions, so as to avoid confusion on the part of the sitters and thevisiting spirits (for there are several codes in use, and confusionsometimes occurs). The most general used and approved code is asfollows: "THREE indicates Yes; ONE indicates No; TWO indicates'doubtful'; FOUR indicates 'don't know'; and FIVE indicates 'call thealphabet. '" The numbers refer to the number of raps or table-tilts, etc. , given by the spirits in answer to questions asked them. When thealphabet is called for, some one of the circle slowly calls out eachletter of the alphabet, in regular order, until a rap or table-tiltindicate that the right letter has been indicated; this letter shouldthen be written down, and the alphabet again called, until the nextletter is indicated; and so on until the message is completed. Forinstance, the name "John" would be spelt out as J-O-H-N, four callingsof the alphabet being necessary to obtain the same. 

The Matter of Time Conditions. 

The time at which the seances are held is not in itself important, butit will be found best to fix such time at such an hour that will be mostconvenient for the sitters, and at which their minds will not bedistracted by thoughts that they should return home, or should beattending to certain household or business duties, etc. The seancesshould be held not oftener than, say, twice a week, or at the most threetimes a week. Each seance should be continued for about an hour or alittle over--certainly not over two hours at a time. The sitters shouldbe punctual in attendance, so that no time may be lost or wasted. Theidea should be that the spirit friends are awaiting your coming tofulfill your engagement with them, and one should be as careful to keepsuch an engagement as he would were the engagement with his most valuedfriend or esteemed acquaintance. Regularity in attendance is alsoimportant, as it is important that so far as possible the same generalconditions be maintained at each and every seance. The seance should bestarted at the same hour on each occasion, at least so far as ispossible, so as to preserve the same time rhythm. 

Opening of the Seance. 

It will be well to open the seance with a few moments of earnest, silentmeditation--a few moments of dwelling "in the silence, " as some havewell called it; and these moments should be observed in a religious anddevotional state of mind, all frivolity and flippancy being carefullyavoided. If some present feel moved to prayer, then by all means let theprayer be made, for there can scarcely be a more fitting occasion forreverent prayer than a properly conducted seance. A few moments ofhymn-singing may also be found advantageous in the direction ofproducing the devotional state of mind on the part of the sitters. Thesitters should preserve a solemn frame of mind and reverent generaldemeanor during the seance--perhaps the best model is that of an oldtime Quaker Meeting in which the silent devout spiritual feeling was soplainly manifest that it could almost be felt physically. Patience isnecessary in conducting a seance, and perseverance is essential. Themanifestations cannot be unduly forced, and there is often required agreat deal of psychical adjustment before the lines of the spiritualcommunication between the two great planes of life are fullyestablished. 

Developing a Medium. 

If the circle be one devoted chiefly to the development of mediumisticpowers in some one of its members, then it will perhaps be best to haveonly that particular medium present. The remainder of the sitters shouldbe highly sympathetic toward the developing medium, and should assumethe mental attitude of help and aid toward him. While the early resultsof such a circle may not be so interesting as those at which a fullydeveloped medium is present, nevertheless the gradual unfoldment of thepowers of the medium will be found highly interesting, and the gradualevolution of the character of the phenomena produced will be a liberaleducation in itself. In case that in the circle there are no particularpersons regarded as being mediums, and where there is a general desireto develop mediumistic powers among many or all of the sitters, theremust be carefully avoided anything approaching a rivalry between themembers of the circle; and at the same time a strong desire and perfectwillingness for the spirit power to manifest through whomsoever it mayprefer, without regard to the personal ambitions of the individualsitters. Most certainly there must be no spirit of "competition" amongthe sitters in the circle. 

The Personnel of the Circle. 

The personal composition of the spiritualistic circle is a veryimportant matter, and those entering into circle work should paycareful attention to the personal and psychical character of thosecomposing the circle; and it may be added here that such work requiresvery nice powers of discrimination, and a great degree of tact, in orderto preserve the proper character of the circle, and at the same time toavoid wounding the pride of those who are to be rejected. Regarding thecharacter of those composing the circle, the following statement of apractical medium will be found of importance. "There are some people whoare so sensitive that they should not sit in circles, because they areliable to become charged with the psychic emanations from, and dominatedby the expectancy of, the sitters, but who are not influenced by spiritpower to any great extent. Or probably there may exist 'crossmagnetism, ' that is to say the inharmonious magnetism of differentmembers who are antagonistic to each other. Some sitters may besarcastic, merely curious, or selfish, or mercenary, or not over clean, sober or scrupulous, and all such surroundings act and react upon thehighly sensitive organization of the undeveloped medium, and, above all, provide conditions favorable for the manifestations of mischievous ormalicious spirits, unless the medium is sufficiently developed, or isprotected by wise spirits powerful enough to resist or control suchinfluences. Like attracts like, as a general rule; but there areexceptions to this, as to most rules, as, for instance, whereunfortunate or unhappy spirits are permitted to manifest, and are evenbrought to the seance by other and more experienced spirit people, sothat they may be helped. The influence of the sitters in moulding theconditions is too little realized. If they introduce an atmosphere ofsuspicion, doubt, distrust, or detraction, they break the continuity ofthe flow of psychic energy that has to be employed. By thus severing thecurrent and dissipating the power, they mar the conditions essential tosuccess; and, as all such disturbances of necessity center upon andinjuriously affect the sensitive medium, they render soul-satisfying anduplifting communion impossible. To all sitters, we would say, 'You getto a very great extent what you make conditions for, therefore open thedoors of the heavens by love and purity. '"

Changing the Sitters. 

Changes in the membership of a circle is sometimes found to be quitebeneficial. If a circle meets night after night with the samemembership, but without obtaining any perceptible results, then it maybe well to consider the desirability of adding some new elements to themembership in the hope of improving the conditions. Sometimes theaddition of a new sitter of the right physical and psychical temperamentworks a most remarkable improvement, and in many of such casesnoteworthy phenomena are then produced almost from the time of thechange. We have seen circles in which the condition of non-success waschanged in a few moments to one of great and marked success by theintroduction of a new element among the sitters. 

Adding a Medium. 

Sometimes there may result certain physical phenomena such as tabletippings and movements of furniture, in cases in which there is asufficient amount of psychic force generated among the sitters; but insuch cases there may be an absolute failure to produce some of thehigher forms of mediumistic phenomena, such as, for instance, clearspirit messages by raps or otherwise, the failure being caused by thefact that the circle did not include in its membership any person ofsufficiently developed mediumistic powers to be considered a "medium. "In such cases the introduction into the circle of a person possessingfairly developed mediumistic powers of the higher order may change thecondition of affairs at once, and almost immediately the highermanifestations may present themselves. In such cases the soil is richlyfertilized and highly cultivated, and all that has been lacking is thestrong, vigorous seed of true mediumship. In such cases when a truemedium is discovered by means of his or her introduction into the circle(for such discovery is often made in this way), it may be well for thecircle afterwards to devote itself to the development of that particularmedium. And it must not be forgotten that such development of theparticular medium frequently also results in the development of theother members sitting in the circle. 

Reasons for Changes. 

In cases in which the spirits suggest changes in the order of sitting ofthe members of the circle, or suggest other changes in the personnel ofthe circle, such suggestions should be heeded, and those who are askedto withdraw from the table should not feel hurt or offended, for thereis usually nothing personal in the matter, and no personal reflectionintended by the spirits; the whole matter is one connected withpsychical or magnetic requirements, and all should so accept it. Awriter on this subject has well said: "If you are requested, either bythe controlling intelligence or by the manager of the circle, to takeanother place, or even if your room is desired for some unknown cause, do not get angry and create a disturbance, but get with those with whomyou are in spiritual harmony and try it again. All who have succeededhave passed through great trials and failures, and when success isgained, think of what you have gained. A knowledge of immortality, possibly, or you have assisted in producing an instrument through whichproofs of immortality may be given. "

Psychic Attunement. 

One of the most common faults of the sitters at a circle is to becomeunduly impatient, and to try to force matters to a clear manifestationof phenomena almost from the moment of the start. This is all wrong, andis frequently the cause of many failures to obtain the higher phases ofmediumistic phenomena. Sitters should remember this important point, i. E. , that the first requisite of the circle should be to secure perfectand free communication and flow of spiritual power--after this the moreelaborate phases of phenomena may be obtained with comparative ease. Oneshould hold in mind the illustration of a great wireless telegraphsystem, in which the sending and receiving instruments have not as yetbeen placed in perfect attunement. In such a case it is of coursenecessary for the two respective sets of instruments to be adjusted sothat they may be in perfect attunement with each other; and until thisis accomplished, there can be messages sent or receivedproperly--certainly none received in this way. If this idea be held inmind, their circle will probably secure the psychic attunement in a muchshorter time than otherwise. 

Pre-Test Manifestations. 

Do not be in too much of a hurry to obtain "test" messages. Let thecommunications flow on in a somewhat rambling manner at first, until thelines of communication are fully and firmly established, and then youmay begin to think about asking test questions of the spirits in orderto establish their identity. A writer says on this point: "Should tablemovements occur, or raps be heard, let them go on for a little. Do notask test questions just yet. Request repetitions, or ask for them to beclearer or louder, so that they may be sharp and decisive. You may alsoask for a certain number of movements or raps. After that, you mayproceed to ask questions as to whether the circle is sitting in the bestarrangement for success. If changes are desired, these should be made assuggested. It may happen that one or more of the sitters may berequested to change places, or to withdraw from the table altogether. Insuch a case the sitter should not take umbrage for it merely means thattheir psychical conditions do not blend with those of the rest of thecircle. "

Premature Tests. 

Regarding the matter of premature tests, or unreasonable demands, thesame writer further says: "Remember that the first requisite is toestablish the channel of communication; and all personal questions as towho and what the spirit is should be reserved until the initialdifficulties are overcome. It is at first most probable that the spiritoperators will not be fully aware just what effect they are producing, and the mind of the medium may not as yet be sufficiently passive, infact it may be in a sort of state of protest against being acted upon inthis particular way; accordingly, it is extremely unwise to attempt toobtain responses to test questions or to secure evidences of theidentity of the spirit under these imperfect conditions. Many mediumsand inquirers have been deterred from further development orinvestigation because such questions have been prematurely put and theanswers pressed for, with the result that confusing and contradictoryresponses were given, and the conclusion was hastily drawn that it wasall fraud, delusion, of the devil. "

Forcing Tests. 

Another writer has said on this point: "I then, in my anxiety, made amistake which anxious inquirers sometimes make. I wanted more--I pressedfor another test, forgetting the difficulties of mediumship, and thesupreme effort which must have been made to give me what I had obtained. And this resulted in failure after remarkable tests had been given. "Another writer, commenting upon the last quoted statement, says: "Thisis exactly how mediums are used; they give test after test, not tosatisfy, but only to produce the desire for more. Then when the power isweakened, comes the inability--or 'fraud, ' as the imperfection inmediumship is often called. This will be the case until they can havethe only condition which is suitable for spiritual communion--passivetrust and confidence. Real tests cannot come when sought withmaterialistic conditions. The tests come unsought, unasked for. "

Spirit Directions. 

Another point which should be borne in mind by the sitters in the circleis that the spirits should be consulted as to just what they wish tomanifest at the seance. They should be asked to state plainly just whatorder of phenomena they desire to manifest and demonstrate, and justwhat they wish the circle to do in order to create the best conditionsfor the manifestation. And it will be found advisable to heed the wishesand instructions of the spirits in such cases, and to conform as far aspossible with the same. In this way the intelligent co-operation ofspirits and the circle may be obtained, and the most desirable resultsbe obtained. However, there is a limit to this acceptance and course, and in no case should the limits of reasonableness be exceeded in thematter. As a writer has well said: "It may happen that the conditionsasked for by the communicating intelligence may seem to be ludicrous orimpracticable; and in such case representations to that effect should bemade to the spirit, and if such instructions are persisted in, exceptwhere, through long association, confidence is felt in the spirit, orvery clear evidence of knowledge has been manifested, the medium andsitters, exercising their own reasoning powers, should quietly andfirmly decline to do what is asked of them, and some other course shouldbe suggested. We do not advise either medium or sitters to blindlyaccept or follow what is given to or through them. Reason should everreign, but even reason will show that in experimental work it issometimes advisable to tentatively adopt and follow some course that maynot, at first sight, appear quite reasonable. "

Questioning the Spirits. 

After a satisfactory arrangement of the sitters is obtained, and thetable tiltings or rappings have assumed a clear, definite character, then the sitters may proceed to ascertain the identity of the spiritseeking to communicate to the circle; or else to ascertain whether thespirit wishes to deliver a message directed specially to some particularone of the sitters. In the latter case, the person indicated shouldprepare to question the spirit direct, either verbally or else silentlyand mentally. In either case the question should be stated clearly andto the point, so that the spirit may give a simple definite answer. Questions which may be answered by a simple "Yes" or "No" are of coursepreferable. If the spirit agrees to move the table, or else produceraps, as the alphabet is called over letter by letter, the communicationand answers may of course be given in much fuller detail. In such casethe spirit may be called on to spell out its name, and to designate itsrelationship to any of the sitters; or even to spell out a completemessage. In addressing the spirit one should pursue the same generalcourse employed in addressing questions to a friend in the flesh; andcare should be taken to address the spirit politely and in a kindlytone. Some spirits are very sensitive concerning these details, and willresent any impoliteness or discourtesy, or flippancy from strangers. 

Substance and Shadow. 

Moreover, the earnest investigator of spiritualistic phenomena mustalways bear in mind that the mere production of mediumistic phenomena ofthe physical phase is not the real object of the investigation andsittings. These things, interesting as they may be in themselves, shouldbe regarded as merely the incidents of the intelligent communication andreception of messages from the inhabitants of the higher planes of lifeand existence. The spiritualistic circle should be more than a mere"wonder shop" in which are exhibited strange and unusual physicalphenomena; rather should it be regarded as the receiving end of thewireless system over which we may and do receive valuable communicationsfrom those who have passed on before us. 

As a writer has said: "It is not so much that the table moves with orwithout contact, or that strange rappings are heard, that is ofparamount importance, but that by these means of communication actualand intelligent communication can be obtained and maintained withso-called dead people; and evidences of spirit identity, as well asloving and cheering messages may be obtained in that way from loved oneswho were supposed to be gone forever. This is the important point to beestablished beyond all peradventure. "

PART IX

MEDIUMISTIC PHENOMENA

Some students of this book who have noted in the foregoing pages certainreferences to the conduct of the sitters in the circle may askthemselves the question: "Why are the SITTERS so important, when thepower is really exerted by the spirits through the MEDIUM?" In fact, such questions, often uttered in the spirit of adverse criticism, arefrequently propounded by sceptics to spiritualists, and it is well thatthe answer should be correctly given. As a matter of fact theunderstanding of such answer will mean the possession of some importantfacts concerning the phenomena of mediumship, and without which theinvestigator will possibly wander far astray from the main road of truthconcerning such phenomena. 

The Part Played by the Sitters. 

All of the best authorities on the subject of spiritualism arepractically agreed concerning the important part played by the sittersin the circle in all manifestations of spirit power. As J. J. Morsesays: "There are three factors concerned in mediumship: (1) the spiritcontrolling; (2) the mental atmosphere of the medium controlled; and (3)the mental atmosphere of the people surrounding the medium. " And as A. Morton has said: "The requirements for honesty on the part of mediumsare equally binding upon investigators; they must have honesty ofpurpose if they expect to attract honest spirits. "

Result of Bad Sitters. 

And Wallis has said: "Although the spirits may be intensely anxious todemonstrate their power, they are sometimes repelled from those whomthey seek to approach by the bristling and discordant conditions ofmind that prevail among the sitters, who disperse with a feeling ofdissatisfaction and disappointment. If the sitters only knew it, theso-called failure was directly traceable to the destructivethought-atmosphere with which they surround themselves and the medium. Too frequently they do not prepare themselves for 'the hour'scommunion with the dead, ' and their mental attitude is anything butconductive to success. They do not put away the thronging thoughts, anxieties, and worries of their busy lives, but carry them right intothe seance chamber, yet expect good spiritual results. Both sitter andmedium may very easily destroy the indispensable conditions ofspirit-manifestation, and the medium's honesty, not his want ofgrowth, or of knowledge, is called in question by the investigator whoknows, and perhaps cares, nothing for the occult laws he has violated, not obeyed. "

Mental Atmosphere of the Medium. 

Likewise, it must not be forgotten that an important factor in theproduction of mediumistic phenomena is that which Morse, in the abovequotation, has called "the mental atmosphere of the medium controlled. "In many cases the spirit powers are present and ready to manifestfreely, and the mental atmosphere of the sitters is likewise desirableand sympathetic, but still the manifestations are but faint, irregular, and generally unsatisfying--the weak link of the chain being found inthe mental state of the medium, and consequently in the mentalatmosphere arising from the same. Such undesirable mental states andatmospheres may be said to arise principally from two general causes, asfollows: (1) Desire on the part of the medium to produce sensational orbrilliant results, and (2) Doubt on the part of the medium concerningthe genuineness and validity of the communications. Let us consider eachof these in further detail. 

The Mediumistic Mind. 

If the medium is filled with the idea or notion of producing brilliantor sensational results, he will in all probability so disturb theplacidity of the receiving surface of his mind that the latter will failto register or record the impressions being made upon it by the spiritvibrations. It is similar to the case of a placid bosom of a deep lakewhich, normally, will reflect clearly and distinctly the images of thesurrounding scenery cast upon it from the light waves; but which, ifdisturbed by strong breezes, will exhibit merely a distorted, disturbed, incomplete, and untrue reflection of the surrounding scenery cast uponits surface. A strong desire of the kind mentioned will tend to agitateand disturb the normal placid condition of the mental reflecting surfaceof the mediumistic mind. 

Mediumistic "Stage Fright. "

In the same way the placid reflecting surface of the mediumistic mindmay become disturbed by the presence of fear, doubt, and distrust in themind of the medium. It may at first seem strange that the medium shoulddoubt the manifestations being made through his mentality, provided thathe be honest and genuine. But the answer and explanation is very simple. The medium (particularly the young medium) may become panic-stricken bythe thought that "perhaps this is merely the result of my ownimagination or fancy, instead of spirit power, " and the result will bethat he will begin to halt and stumble, stammer and stutter, instead ofallowing the message to flow through him uninterrupted. This isparticularly true when the message is of the nature of a test ofidentity, and where the vocal organs of the medium are being employed inthe manifestation. It occurs far more frequently than the publicsuppose, that the medium is stricken by stage-fright or the panic offear, arising from the causes above given, i. E. The sudden fear that heis allowing his fanciful imagination to run away with him instead of hisbeing under genuine control. 

The Psychic Telephone System. 

The medium should ever strive to guard against this harmful mentalstate, and should open himself completely to the spirit influence, casting aside all fear and doubt, and placing all responsibility uponthe controlling spirit or band of helpers. The medium should rememberthat he is merely the "medium" or psychic telephone system, and is notan active party to the process of spirit communication. He should, therefore, never either unduly strive to please, nor be fearful ordistrustful concerning the validity of the manifestation being madethrough him. Let the spirits attend to their end of the line, and thesitters to the other end--the medium is on neither end of the line, butis the line itself. 

Interrupted Communications. 

It should not be forgotten, in this connection, that the spirits havetheir own difficulties to contend with. In the current slang phrase, they "have troubles of their own" to overcome in the production ofmediumistic phenomena. Not only does the spirit wishing to communicatehave to draw sufficient psychic power from the medium and the sitters, not only has he to scientifically adjust the apparatus at the sendingend of the psychic telephonic line, but he has also to be sure that heis actually communicating the message so that it may be received by thesitters. In such cases the spirit is placed in a position similar tothat of a person at one end of a telephone line, who after had an answerto his opening "Hello!" talks away, thinking that the person at theother end is hearing every word he utters, perfectly unconscious thatthe communication has been interrupted from some cause or other commonto telephone lines. How often do we, in our telephone conversations, interrupt our flow of talk to anxiously inquire, "Are you still there?"or "Do you hear me?"

Some Difficulties of the Spirits. 

A writer on the subject has well said regarding this difficulty on thepart of the communicating spirit: "Spirits have many difficulties toovercome. " On one occasion, a medium felt the influence of an arisenfriend very strongly. It was accompanied by an intense desire to speak, and yet the medium was unable to give utterance to that which the spiritwished to have said. In answer to an inquiry that was subsequently madeas to why the spirit had been unable to communicate with his dear ones, one of the familiar controls of the medium explained that he thoughtthat he had actually spoken. His feeling of nearness to them was sovivid, and his wish to express himself through the lips of the mediumhad been so intense, that it was only after he had ceased his efforts tocontrol that he realized that he had only THOUGHT and INTENDED, but hadnot succeeded in compelling the sensitive to utter his message. Thiswill perhaps explain why mediums sometimes rise to their feet and act asif they were about to speak, but get no further--they do not receive theimpression, or the right mental impulse; they feel as if they COULDspeak and yet they have nothing to say. At such times a few words ofsympathy and inquiry from the conductor of the circle may assist thecontrol to realize the situation and succeed in his endeavors tocommunicate. 

Difficulties Overcome. 

"Even on this side, when we send telegraphic messages or use thetelephone, mistakes and misunderstandings are by no means uncommonoccurrences, and our letters sometimes create an impression in the mindof the reader which we did not intend to convey. Is it any wonder, then, that messages from the other side are imperfectly impressed upon, andincorrectly rendered by, the medium? Most persons who have attempted totransfer thoughts to mesmerized sensitives have realized that generalideas can be transmitted much more easily than names, dates, or specificwords can be impressed upon or expressed by the subject. The wonder is, not that so few names, ages, and special details are given by spirits toand through mediums, but that, considering all the attendantcircumstances, so MANY 'test' messages are continually being given, bothprivately and in public. "

The Psychic Triangle. 

In considering the question of the requisites of the mediumistic circle, the student should remember always that there is A PSYCHIC TRIANGLE inall such circles, viz. , a triangle of which the spirit constitutes oneside, the medium a second side, and the sitters a third side. And it isessential that a harmony and sympathy between all three sides of thetriangle should be preserved and maintained. Therefore, sitters at thecircle should endeavor to do their part in producing and maintainingsuch harmony with both the medium, the spirits, and finally WITH EACHOTHER--and this last is not the least, by any means. Unless there be atleast a very fair degree of harmony between the several membersconstituting the circle, there will be something important lacking intheir harmony of the circle as a whole toward the other two sides of thepsychical triangle. 

Harmonious Relationship. 

The sitters composing the circle should always remember that mutualharmony is a most important factor contributing to the success of themanifestations sought to be secured. Accordingly, each sitter shouldstrive to bring himself or herself into a sympathetic and harmoniousrelationship with each and every other sitter, so far as is possible. Toaccomplish this result the sitters should endeavor, so far as ispossible, to lay aside their respective prejudices, jealousies, anddifferences of opinion. These incidents of their personality should beleft, together with their hats and outer wraps, in the outer hall of thehouse in which the seance is held. Differences of religion, politics, race and creed, all should be cast aside at least temporarily, in orderthat the greatest amount of harmony should be manifested by the group. Asafe rule to follow is this: seek to find the largest number of pointsof mutual agreement, and to set aside all the rest of the items ofpersonal tastes, customs and habits of feeling and thought. Dwelltogether on the plane of common agreement, shutting out the planes ofrespective disagreements. In this connection we should state that thecustomary attitude of cold reserve, blended and colored by suspicion, which too often is found between comparative strangers, is far frombeing helpful in producing the best conditions for the seance. For thetime being, at least, the sitters should try to remember that they areall members of one great human family, and united by the bonds of commonorigin and nature. 

The Discordant Note. 

A writer recites an incident in a circle which he once attended, whichso thoroughly illustrates the point just made, that we think it worthwhile to reproduce it here. He says: "On one occasion in particular, wehad a remarkable illustration of the detrimental influence of one or twositters. It occurred at a seance at which a number of mediums werepresent, and, under ordinary circumstances, successful results wouldhave been practically certain; but this was not an ordinary seance--atleast, not in the opinion of one lady who apparently imagined that shehad been invited to discover fraud, and that the rest of us weresuspicious characters. Up to the moment of her appearance in the circlewe were a happy family of sociable folk, and enjoyed a very pleasantseason of conversational interchange. When, however, the said lady, accompanied by a friend, joined the company, there was a silence thatcould be felt. The social temperature fell rapidly--people visiblystiffened and became constrained. The two ladies appeared to feel afraidto speak lest they should say anything that might be used by themediums, and spoke in monosyllables. Sitting bolt upright, grim andsilent, they drew up to the table, and when the phenomena began theydisplayed no signs of interest. Their 'detective' attitude was soobjectionable that even those who had endeavored to thaw out theseself-constituted Sherlock Holmeses, gave up the attempt, and, inconsequence, what had promised to be a really enjoyable evening, provedone of the most uncomfortable it has been our lot to experience. "

Antagonistic Elements. 

Another incident of the kind is related by a writer, as follows: "On oneoccasion, when some experiments were being made by a medium, undercontrol, in the direction of psychometry and clairvoyance, a ladyexpressed a desire to be the subject for delineation. After one or twoefforts the medium exclaimed, 'I am very sorry, but for some reason I amquite unable to get anything from you, or for you. ' Shortly afterwardsthe lady in question remarked to one of the sitters, 'I knew he wouldnot be able to give me anything. That is the third medium that I haveknocked out. ' The failure to obtain results under such impossibleconditions is a proof of the genuine psychic nature of the powers of themediums. If they were pretenders they would succeed in doing somethingunder any circumstances and in spite of such adverse psychicconditions. " While we are far from holding that the sitters in a circleshould lay aside all ordinary caution and good judgment, and instead toassume the mental attitude of utter and unquestioning credulity andacceptance, we do positively declare that the mental state ofpreconceived distrust and suspicion is often almost fatal to theproduction and demonstration of the highest manifestations of spiritphenomena. 

The Open Mind. 

The proper mental state of the scientific investigator of spiritualisticphenomena is that of "the open mind. " The sitters should endeavor to layaside all prejudices and preconceived conceptions, and in place thereofshould endeavor to hold a fair, impartial mental attitude--and thisaccompanied by a desire to have the manifestations proceed naturally, freely and fully. The results should be sympathetically awaited andreceived, and the judgment of careful reasoning withheld until afterwardwhen the whole proceedings may be recalled and considered in the lightof cold reason. One has but to consider the extremely sensitivepsychical condition of the mentality of the medium, and the nicelybalanced mental atmosphere of the circle, to realize how easily thissensitiveness may be affected, and the nice balance be disturbed, by theprojection of strong mental waves of distrust, suspicion, and antagonisminto the atmosphere of the circle. The attitude of the intelligentscientific investigator should be that of a calm and observant soul. Such an investigator should have what Sir William Crookes once called "amind to let, " i. E. , a mind from which all prejudices and preconceivedtheories and notions have been ejected for the time being, and intowhich Truth, from any source, should always be welcomed as a tenant. Instead of seeking to throw obstacles in the way of the medium, oneshould endeavor to assist by mental attitude and demeanor, and byobservance of the necessary conditions, in the production of the spiritmanifestations and in the demonstration of spirit identity. 

Spirits and the Sense of Humor. 

It is not necessary for the sitters to assume an attitude ofpreternatural gravity and solemnity. Instead, they should be natural andcheerful, though of course not flippant or trifling, or indulging in anexhibition of the cheap remarks which by so many is mistaken for wit. The sense of humor, however, need not be thrown aside or discarded, foras all investigators know many of the spirit visitors have a very highlydeveloped sense of humor, and sometimes even go so far as to seeminglyendeavor to shock some of the melancholy, over-serious, "prunes andprism" type of sitters. As a writer well says: "Spirits are human still, and a good, breezy laugh, a hearty, joyous, kindly sympatheticdisposition, goes a long way to open the avenues by which they canapproach us. " Another has said: "Experience has taught that thespiritual circle should be presided over by 'a pure heart and a stronghead'--to which qualities might well be added a well-ordered developmentof the sense of humor, for the absence of humor often tends to makephilosophy grotesquely ill-proportioned. "

Rhythmic Harmony. 

The manifestation of rhythmic harmony often materially aids in thegeneration of psychic power, and the consequent production ofadvantageous conditions at the circle. Many circles are opened by havingthe several sitters indulge in harmonious rhythmic breathing for a fewminutes--all breathing in unison--in order to produce this condition ofrhythm. Those who have never practiced this unison of rhythmic breathingwill be surprised at the consciousness of psychical harmony which may beproduced in this way among a number of persons gathered together in acircle. This principle of RHYTHM is what is really involved in the callof many spirits for singing at the beginning of a seance. In singingthere is a certain unison and rhythm unconsciously observed, and it isthis rather than the air or words of the songs which produces the desireconditions. A writer states that upon one occasion a manifesting spiritsaid: "It isn't NOISE that I want; it's HARMONY! If you cannot sing, youcan at least count out loud, and count altogether--THAT may give us theright vibrations. " That spirit had the right idea, and one which itwould be well for all sitters to remember and put into effect. Vibrationis the secret of all things, and rhythm is the measure and spirit of allvibrations; therefore, the very HARMONY of a circle may be said to berhythmic. There is a great truth involved in these statements, and youwill do well to ponder over them. 

Retarding Factors. 

It should be almost unnecessary to state that haste, hurry andimpatience are retarding factors in a spiritualistic seance; but, alas, too many persons seem to be totally unaware of this important fact. Wecall your attention to the following remarks concerning this point, thesame having been made by a writer on the subject who himself is a mediumof extended experience. He says: "Impatience and anxiety aredisintegrating mental conditions. People who are all the time looking attheir watches and thinking, 'Oh! I wish they would hurry up. ' 'Oh! do bequick, don't keep us here all night, we shall surely miss our train, 'etc. , are disturbers of the peace, and break the conditions whichrequire harmony and repose. 'We have found out that we cannot hurrythem, ' said a lady who had enjoyed much experience in circles; andconsequently, when you are sitting for different phenomena, you need tohave plenty of time and be prepared to sit good humoredly for hours, ifneed be, to see it through; and then results are likely to speedilyensue; whereas the more you try to hurry, the more anxious you become, the less likelihood is there that you will secure results at all. Youcan surely realize that hurry, impatience, anxiety, intense expectancy, fear and suspicion must of necessity disturb the conditions and proveinimical to the efforts of the spirit operators to present clear andconvincing demonstrations of their power and identity. "

Reasonable Demands of Spirits. 

In the above stated instance, and others similar to it, it at firstseems as if the spirits were overparticular, and "finnicky" about theconditions, but a little careful thought will show you that this is notthe real state of affairs at all. The spirits are not "finnicky, " butare merely desirous of securing the conditions necessary to a successfulmanifestation, and all their efforts are bent toward that end. This, andthis alone, is the cause of their so-called "finnickiness. " Surely theyare justified in this--would not any and all of us feel the same way ifwe were trying to establish communications with another plane, wheresuch communication largely dependent upon the production and maintenanceof certain conditions? I think so. 

Harmonious Conditions. 

It is not an easy task to give specific directions for development ofmediumistic power for the guidance of one who is desirous of unfoldingsuch powers after they have first manifested their presence in him. Infact, as many of the best authorities on the subject agree, it ispractically impossible to lay out a course of cut-and-dried directionsof this kind. This arises logically from the conditions present in suchcases, and from the special circumstances surrounding the subject ofmediumship. In fact, it may be broadly stated that at the beginning themedium can do but little in the direction of such development, otherthan to present harmonious conditions through which the spirits may beable to manifest their presence and their power. 

The Channel of Communication. 

It must be always remembered that the medium is not the active agent inthe production of mediumistic phenomena--he is not called to DO anythingexcept to passively act as the medium or channel of communicationbetween the two planes of existence. He is always the intermediarybetween the two planes, and is not the active agent on either plane. Theactive agents are the spirits on the one plane, and the sitters in thecircle on the other plane. The sitters must supply much of the actualoperative power from the one plane, and the spirits must do all of thecommunication from the other plane. The medium serves to connect the twoopposite ends of the psychic telephone system so that the messages maypass through and over the mediumistic channel, secure and maintain thebest psychic conditions. 

The Role of the Spirits. 

We have spoken of the part of the work which it is necessary for thesitters to perform in order to And now we shall have something to sayconcerning the part to be played properly by the spirits wishing tocommunicate. It must not be supposed for a moment that every spirit ispossessed of the necessary knowledge enabling it to communicate easilythrough a medium, or even to develop the medium so that he may become anefficient channel of communication. Spirits are frequently found to besadly deficient in such knowledge and experience, and the development ofthe medium as well as the production of satisfactory phenomena, sufferfrom this lack. The spirits who seek to use a medium may or may not befitted for such task. Many spirits are utterly unable to properlydevelop a medium; some fail by reason of their lack of knowledge, andothers fail because of their lack of special aptitude for the task. 

Differences Among Spirits. 

A writer on this subject well says regarding this particular point:"Some spirits may lack both knowledge and aptitude; others may have theknowledge, but yet fail from want of the power to control. They may beable to affect one mediumistic person and not another. Likewise, theymay be able to use a sensitive medium for one phase of mediumship, andyet be unable to succeed in any other direction. A spirit may be in suchconditions that he can produce good physical phenomena; he may, however, try to do so through a sensitive who is fitted only for trance orclairvoyant mediumship, but who does not possess the quality or psychicforce for sensuous manifestations. A medium who is naturally qualifiedfor physical demonstrations may persist in desiring trance orinspirational mediumship, and be determined to become a speaker ornothing. 

Disturbing Elements. 

"Frequently at the outset both spirits and sitters are ignorant of theirpowers, of the conditions necessary for success, and the associationthat exists between them being affectional rather than intellectual orspiritual, they have to grope their way towards each other. It follows, therefore, that experiments have to be made on BOTH sides. Sitters andyoung mediums often spoil the seances by over-anxiety. There would notbe half so much heard of 'evil spirits' (so-called) if more regard werepaid to the necessity of maintaining a calm, patient, and serene frameof mind. Some people become excited as soon as phenomena commences;mediums not infrequently get nervous or timid when they feel that theyare being affected, and, although they desire to be controlled, they areAFRAID to submit to the influences when they are likely to loseconsciousness. All these are disturbing elements, and naturallyinterfere with the flow of the forces that are to be utilized, andprevent the success that is desired. A spirit without any very definitepurpose, finding himself in the presence of a mediumistic person, mayseek to influence him, and spasmodic actions may result. Unless thecontrol should soon give evidence of clear thought and definite purpose, he should be requested, in a kindly and courteous manner, to seek theassistance of some spirit who understands the methods to be employed, and induce him to exert his power for the benefit of the medium and thecircle. "

Impersonation Mediumship. 

One of the most interesting phases of mediumship, and the one perhapsmost sought after by earnest seekers of the truth concerning those whohave passed over to a higher plane of existence, is that commonly knownas "impersonation mediumship, " or perhaps "impersonating testmediumship, " in which the vocal organs of the medium are employed by thecommunicating spirit in order to speak directly to those in the circle, or to the visiting friend of the decarnate spirit who comes into thepresence of the medium. Many mediums devote their entire time andattention to this phase of mediumship, and place themselves at theservice of those on the earth plane who wish to converse directly withtheir spirit friends or relatives who have passed on. This is by far themost satisfying phase of mediumship to those on the earth plane who arethus enabled to receive communications, and perhaps even direct answersto specific questions made to them. The most convincing evidences of theidentity of the communicating spirit are also obtained through thisparticular form of mediumship. And this affording of comfort to thosestill on the earth plane is one of the most satisfying features ofmediumship, and one which will do more than aught else to reconcile themedium to annoyances and to the personal sacrifices so often made by themedium. 

The True Purpose of Mediumship. 

A writer has well given to mediums the following inspiring messageconcerning the nature, purpose and aims of their work: "The modes ofspirit manifestation are many, the phases wonderfully varied, but, likea golden cord running through them all, there is a distinct purpose ofbringing to those on earth the glad tidings and proof positive ofcontinued conscious personal experience in the life after death. Theprocess of psychic development is usually slow, and the medium will belikely to grow disheartened; but by looking back over the ground alreadytraversed, and by comparing the faint efforts made at the commencementwith the later and fuller indications of spirit power, he should feelencouraged, and proceed with renewed vigor. "

Gradual Development. 

The best authorities constantly impress upon young mediums the fact thatthey should develop their mediumistic powers to a considerable degreebefore they venture to give public seances or exhibitions of theirpower. As Dr. Dean Clarke well says: "Novices in mediumship have nobusiness to assume obligations they are not fully qualified to fulfil. Let them take the counsel metaphorically given by Jesus, to 'tarry inJerusalem till their beards are grown. '" They should by all means waituntil the spirits are strong enough to control and guard them from themeddlesome interferences of other persons, both those in the flesh andthose out of it. Many spirits will overwork the medium, and the latternot knowing enough to protect himself will often suffer by reasonthereof. On the other hand, young mediums often yield to theimportunities of friends and other sitters, and will try to oblige andsatisfy them, even often at the expense of their own powers and forces. 

Public Seances. 

A writer, himself a successful medium, gives the following good adviceto young mediums: "I strongly advise all mediums to wait and serve outtheir apprenticeship thoroughly before they undertake to sit forsceptics or perform public work, either as test, impersonating, speaking, seeing, or healing mediums; and the best place to secure thenecessary experience, training and unfolding is in the home circle. After a certain stage has been reached, however, the medium who has beenused for impersonations will in all probability begin to display thepowers of clairvoyance and to receive vivid impressions. Then will come, or they will be accompanied by, the efforts of the spirits to passbeyond the purely personal and limited forms of expression associatedwith the affectionate messages and greetings, to the consideration andexplanation of the conditions and experiences of life on the other side. Spirits who can teach and give more sequential and sustained addresseswill in all likelihood assume control, and under such conditions it willbe found necessary to enlarge the circle and introduce fresh sitters. The clairvoyant, or psychometrist, needs new subjects with whom toexperiment, and the speaking medium requires an audience to listen tohis discourses, so that the next step beyond the small private circlemay well be a semi-public one, or an 'after circle' such as isfrequently held at the close of the public Sunday services in manytowns, at which mediums who have reached this stage are afforded theopportunities they need. 

Home Circle Development. 

"Around the family table, where those who are united in affection meetto hold joyous communion with their spirit friends, where the blendeddesire ascends to the spiritual plane, and becomes the potent magneticattraction, by which those friends can establish harmonious relationswith the sitters--in such a circle and under such conditions even a weakdegree of mediumistic responsiveness to the outpouring from the spiritside will become intensified and exalted, until rhythmic vibrations areestablished and thought and emotion will readily pass from one toanother, and all will be attuned. The best method of cultivation is toregard the mediumistic sensitiveness as a natural and desirable quality, to be evolved by training and experiments, under the direction of thereason and the conscience. In this manner the tribunal which decides theconduct of life is ever present, and no matter what influences arebrought to bear on the sensitive he remains steadfast, realizing thatthe responsibility for use or abuse rests upon himself. "

Undue Prolongation of Seances. 

There is a great temptation to young mediums to allow their enthusiasm, and desire to aid in demonstrating spiritualistic phenomena, to causethem to prolong their seances far beyond the limits which prudence andregard for the medium's physical well-being would dictate. There is acertain stimulation and excitement arising from the manifestation ofphenomena through the medium, and this in itself is helpful rather thanhurtful--a tonic rather than a depressant; but like all other forms ofoverindulgence, and excessive yielding to this excitement tends to bringon a reaction and a swing to the opposite emotional extreme, and themedium suffers thereby in many cases. There comes a time in all seanceswhen the high-water mark of psychic power is reached, and this is a goodtime for the medium to bring the seance to a close--in fact, experiencedmediums do precisely this very thing at this particular time. But thispoint once passed, there is experienced a peculiar weakening anddepressing feeling, this often being accompanied by a physical wearinessand a feeling of chilliness in the extremities, or even a slight chillyfeeling over the whole body. When these feelings are experienced, themedium should remember that the limit of reason has been passed, and heshould bring matters to a close without further loss of time. Experienced spirits will usually detect the approach of the reactiontime, and will, themselves, bring the seance to a close, independent ofany action on the part of the medium. But when the spirits are notexperienced, they fail to notice this, or even may become careless aboutsuch things in their desire to communicate to the circle. In the lattercases, the medium must take care of himself. 

Good Advice to Young Mediums. 

A mediumistic writer gives the following advice on this subject to youngmediums: "Never forget that your nerve-vital energy is used and expendedin the exercise of your mediumship, and that the supply is limited, hence the necessity for care and moderation. Too frequent, prolonged, or discordant seances; inharmonious conditions and sittings, when youare already jaded and exhausted, are therefore to be avoided. If youmake excessive demands upon your energies, nervous prostrations andderangements are an almost inevitable consequence. It is not the use ofmediumship, but its abuse that is dangerous--perversion and excess areas injurious in this direction as they are in others, whereas temperateand healthful exercises are strengthening and exhilarating. If you feel'run down, ' decline to act. If you feel that the circle is inharmonious, or that the sitters are depleted and exacting, refuse to sit. If youfeel that you are tired, and feel weary and debilitated on the dayfollowing your seances, you may be sure that you are sitting too long, or that you require the help of a larger circle of congenial friends tosupply the requisite psychic force for your further development. "

Self-Protection for Mediums. 

Another writer says on this subject: "Mediumship occasionally acts insuch a manner that it becomes a stimulant to every organ and function ofthe system, and the individual becomes excited, nervous, and irritable;hence, the greater the acceleration of physiological functions as theresult of psychical influences upon the human body, the more need ofcaution and restraint in every department of physiological life. " But itmust not be understood that the proper practice of mediumship is harmfuland not conducive to good health. On the contrary, as a writer has said:"We consider the highest degree of physical health perfectly compatiblewith the best manifestation of mediumship. " Another writer has wellsaid: "If you are not robust enough, if you have not sufficientknowledge and self-mastery to use your will and maintain control overyour psychic self; if you are unable to guard against the adverseemanations or the drawing power of others, you had better take lessonsin concentration and psychic self-protection; and until you understandthe art of self-possession, refrain from attempting to cultivate yoursensitiveness. It will never do for you to be 'too sensitive'--benatural, sensible, and strong. "

Danger in Indiscriminate Magnetizing. 

Another point against which the medium should guard himself, is that ofallowing others, indiscriminately, to "magnetize" him to "aid hisdevelopment" or to "increase his power. " Mediums, particularly while inthe psychic condition, are very sensitive and susceptible to outsidemental influences. And for this reason they should be particularly onguard against allowing themselves to be "magnetized" or influencedpsychically by persons of whom they know nothing. Otherwise, the mediumnot only places himself under subjection to the mentality andemotionality of strangers and undesirable persons, just as would ahypnotic subject if he placed himself under the control of such persons. Moreover, in the case of the medium, there is a danger of his being soinfluenced in this way that thereafter he may attract to himself a classof undesirable spirit influences who would otherwise never have comeinto his psychic aura or world. We call attention to the followingadvice on this point given by an experienced mediumistic writer:

Detrimental Magnetic Influence. 

"No sensible person should surrender himself to the magnetic influenceof a human being of whom he knew nothing; he should need to know andhave confidence in him before doing so; yet we find many who, impelledby a desire to be a medium, without understanding how much the wordimplies, sit down and invite any magnetizer who comes along toexperiment upon him. Under such circumstances, nothing but a high motiveand a pure purpose will protect them from the operations of unwise ormischievous intelligences. As well might they go and sit in a publicplace with their eyes blindfolded, and with an inscription on theirbreasts, 'Who will come and magnetize me?' * * Mesmeric influence froman experienced operator, for the purpose of inducing susceptibility, issometimes helpful to a sensitive. If the mesmerist can put you in thetrance condition and then hand you over to trustworthy spirits tocontrol you, well and good. In the same way, mesmeric passes may behelpful in the liberation of your clairvoyant powers. The operator maysucceed in throwing you into the deep trance state, in which you maytravel or become clairvoyant, but we would not recommend you to submitto mesmeric influence or hypnotic suggestions from anyone, unless youknow that he is experienced and a thoroughly honorable and trustworthyindividual. In circles for development one member is frequentlyimpressed, or controlled to make magnetic passes over another to aid inhis unfoldment; and if such a thing should happen to you, and theinfluence is congenial, there need be no objection raised by you; butbeware of those people who claim to be able, by mesmerism, to developyou into a medium in a given period of time. "

Mediumistic Auto-Suggestion. 

Other authorities have pointed out the fact that in some cases hypnotismhas resulted in a sort of pseudo-mediumship, or bogus mediumship, inwhich the control is not that of a real spirit, but is merely the resultof the suggestion of the hypnotizer, or else the auto-suggestion of thewould-be medium himself. A writer on the subject has said of this: "Intoo many cases, only the power of auto-hypnotism is manifested, and wehave obsession, fraud and folly as the result. There is one sure methodof detecting the auto-hypnotic trance, and showing the differencebetween that and the genuine spirit trance. Any competent magnetist orhypnotiser can throw off the spell in all cases of self-induced trance, unless it has reached the condition of complete catalepsy. But if aspirit has induced the trance and controls the medium, it will laugh atthe hypnotist's efforts to restore him to the ordinary condition. Themost unfortunate feature of this sorry business is that the poor subjectis self-deceived, and imagines that he is a full-fledged medium; andwhen he has made some terrible break on the platform or elsewhere heshields himself by laying all the responsibility upon some supposedspirit guide. "

"Psychic Sponges. "

A writer has also called the attention of young mediums to anotherundesirable class of psychic hangers-on at seances, as follows: "Thereare some people who, when they sit in a circle, are extremely helpful, and give off the right kind of force that readily blends with that ofthe sensitive; but there are others who draw upon and appropriate thepsychic forces which are needed by the medium, or by the spirits throughthe medium. While they mean well, enjoy the seances, and feel 'SO muchbetter' after them, the success of the circle is endangered so far asthe object for which it was formed is concerned. Such persons are'psychic sponges, ' and should be requested to sit outside the circle, orbe asked kindly to refrain from attending. "

Investigate Your Spirits. 

Finally, the young medium should understand the true nature of thespirits, and just how far he may be safely guided by their advice andwishes. The instructions given by an intelligent spirit of goodcharacter may be safely followed as a rule, but the character andgeneral intelligence of a particular spirit must first be ascertainedthrough acquaintance with him. Until the character of a spirit has beenfully established, and his claim to intelligence well supported by hismessages, the medium will do well to rely on his or her own goodjudgment and intuition. As a writer has well said: "The medium must keepa level head and proceed cautiously. He should never allow any spirit, in or out of the body, to usurp his right of private judgment orexercise any undue authority over him. Eternal vigilance is the priceof liberty; you must use your own discretion and try the spirits beforeyou trust to them. "

Spirits Are Still Human Beings. 

Many persons seem to be under the impression that because a spirithappens to have passed out of the body he will, of necessity, know thetruth about every subject in the range of human thought, and can make nomistakes, and can always work miracles. But this is a grave mistake; itshould always be remembered that a decarnate spirit is as much a humanbeing as is an incarnate spirit such as yourself; and not any better orworse, on the average, than yourself or other incarnate spirits. Oneneeds but to remember that all sorts and conditions of people areconstantly passing out on to the spirit plane, and that, at least forsome time, they continue to be practically the same kind of persons thatthey were on the earth plane. This being so, it will be seen that itwould be very unwise to surrender oneself indiscriminately to each andevery kind of spirit who happens to manifest his presence at a seance. Persons in the flesh should talk and reason with those out of the fleshjust as they would were the latter still on the earth-plane of life. Awriter well says: "In a developing circle many things can be tolerated, because both sides are experimenting and 'feeling their way towards eachother, ' and it is difficult at first to know just what is necessary orpossible. But it is a safe rule to follow for one to refuse to bedictated to by the spirits and to decline to go on blindly. "

Beware of Domineering Spirits. 

A writer has given the following good advice to young mediums, whichsuch will do well to heed: "Do not always be ready to be controlled, orto drop into a trance just because you 'feel the influence, ' and 'aspirit wants to say something, ' or to oblige injudicious friends who'wish you would let him come. ' Many people are very inconsiderate, andalthough they do not SAY so, they THINK (and the sensitive FEELS theirthought) 'I do wish he would go under control and tell me something. 'You should decline to be controlled EXCEPT at the times when youvoluntarily and with set purpose lay yourself open to the influence ofthe spirits, in a properly constituted circle, or when you are preparedfor it. If the spirits cause you to do foolish or ridiculous things, gently but firmly refuse to again submit. Do not be induced to yield bypromise of future greatness and success. Not a few people have had theirvanity tickled and their ambitions aroused by the flattery of crafty anddomineering spirits, and in consequence they have been misled into doingand saying very absurd and foolish things. "

PART X

EXPERIENCES IN THE CIRCLE

When a circle of sensitive people has been formed, and the necessarypreliminaries of the first sitting have been completed, it is not at allinfrequent that even at the first sitting there should be more or lessmanifestation of spirit power. In many cases the sensitives among thesitters begin to experience a peculiar sensation in their arms andhands, the latter being placed on the table in front of them. 

Signs of Spirit Presence. 

There will be manifested in most cases a peculiar sense of heaviness orweight in the hands on the table, and an impression that the hands arebeing held to the table as if by glue or other adhesive material. In thearms are manifested peculiar tingling, pricking sensations, or a"needles and pins" feeling, something akin to a gentle current ofelectricity passing along them. Sometimes there is experienced thesensation of a gentle cool breeze passing over the sitters--particularlyover the backs of their hands. In other cases there may be a sense ofnumbness or partial loss of sensation, something akin to thatexperienced when a hand or arm "goes to sleep, " as the popular phraseexpresses it. In other cases there is manifested a peculiar jerking, twitching, or vibration of the hands and arms, sometimes extending tothe whole body of some of the sitters. Sometimes the hand of the mediumwill begin to make motions as if he were trying to write, and a pencilplaced in his hands may trace crude figures or attempts at letters. Atthis stage it will be found that the singing of hymns or similar musicwill tend to have a quieting, soothing, harmonizing effect. 

Spirit Rappings. 

At the first sitting, or one shortly following after the first, it islikely that raps will be produced, and communication established in thisway. In such case the leader of the circle (not the medium) should besure to inform the spirits just what communicating code is to be used inthe circle, so that there may be no misunderstanding concerning thesame. In such case he should address the spirits as if there wereseveral present, for such will most likely be the case. It must beremembered, however, that the raps will not always come from the table. They may also, for that matter, come from the wall, the ceiling, or fromsome of the furniture in the room. The table raps come from the top ofthe table or under the table. Sometimes they sound like ordinary raps, and then again they may give forth a peculiar hollow sound which isdifficult to describe or to definitely locate. The appearance of theseraps give positive proof that the conditions are being established moreor less fully, and the success of the circle is almost sure to follow. 

Table Tippings. 

Sometimes, however, in place of the raps being manifested by the spiritforces, there will instead be manifested that peculiar tipping of thetable which was the distinguishing characteristic of earlyspiritualistic phenomena in the western countries. In this case thetipping of the table will proceed just as in the case of the raps, sofar as the transmission of messages is concerned. That is to say, thetable will tilt three times, one time, etc. , in accordance with thecode, just as in the case of communication by means of the raps. Inaddition to this, however, the table may begin to manifest strangemotions; it may begin to raise itself, jump around, spin around on oneleg, slide across the rooms, etc. In such cases the hands of the sittersshould be kept on the table, or if they slip off they should be at oncereplaced thereupon. Sometimes heavy tables will manifest more activitythan the lighter ones. 

The Spirit Signals. 

When these rappings or table-tiltings begin to be manifested, all in thecircle should keep cool and calm, and should refuse to become agitatedor excited. If the phenomena should be apparently meaningless anddisconnected, and resulting in no definite communication from the otherside, do not jump to the conclusion that the meaningless rapping orsenseless table tipping is the work of foolish spirits or flippantdecarnate entities. On the contrary, you must remember that not only isyour circle experimenting, but that the spirits on the other side arealso experimenting in hopes of securing proper conditions forintelligent communications and definite messages. As we have saidbefore, the spirits have their own troubles, as well as the sitters, andboth sides are really engaged in an effort to "find each other. " As awriter has said: "Remember also that you are merely experimenting, andthat the spirit people are also, perhaps for the first time, trying topenetrate the veil and utilize powers and agencies of which, in allprobability, they know as little as do you. So many disturbing factorsexist--weather, varying psychical conditions of the sitters, agitatedmental states, too great expectancy, or anxiety for successfuldemonstrations--that the true disposition to be maintained by theinquirer is that of the scientific student, who carefully watches whattranspires, and endeavors to discover the causes of failure as well asthe conditions which favor success. "

Flashes of Communication. 

In some cases the circle will have to sit several times before thepersistent though disconnected and apparently meaningless raps ortable-tilts will begin to show positive signs of intelligent signalling. The same thing would probably occur were the inhabitants of the planetMars to find themselves able to flash signals to our earth--for a longtime the flashes would seem meaningless to us, until at last they wouldseem to manifest a definite intelligent purpose and rhythm. When thisstage of the raps or table-tilts has been reached, then the leader ofthe circle should acquaint the spirits with the code used, and askdefinite questions concerning the future conduct of the seance, theanswers to which the spirits are requested to give through the signalcode of raps or tilts. When these answers begin to "come through"plainly and definitely, then the seance enters a new phase. 

Spirit Code Signals. 

In this new phase, when once entered into, the formal set procedure tobe followed will be about as follows: The leader of the circle, recognizing the signs of the presence of spirits in the circle, willaddress them and ask them whether or not there is a spirit present whowishes to convey a message to the circle, or to any one present. Thenthe spirits signal back in the affirmative or the negative. If theanswer be in the affirmative, the circle leader asks the spirits toindicate by the affirmative signal when the name of the right personpresent is named--and he then proceeds to slowly and plainly name eachperson present, in succession, until the affirmative signal is received. Or, he may ask the spirits to indicate the identity of the spiritfriends present, when their names are called; and he then proceeds tocall over the names of the departed friends of those present, as thesame are requested by the sitters or visitors to the circle. When theright name is reached, the spirits signal in the affirmative, either byraps of table-tilts, etc. After the question-and-answer line ofcommunication has been firmly and strongly established, more definiteinformation may be obtained by the instruction of the system of"alphabet calling, " as described in a preceding portion of this book. In this system, the letters of the alphabet are slowly and clearlycalled off, in succession, until the affirmative signal is givenregarding the letter just called, which indicates that that letter is tobe marked down as a part of the sentence. Wonderful messages have beenreceived in this way, although the process is very slow and somewhattedious in the case of long messages. 

Ouija Boards. 

Of late years the sitters at circles have found a quicker method ofobtaining "letter by letter" messages by means of the apparatus called"the Ouija Board, " which consists of a moving "Planchette" with anindicator which moves over the letters marked on a board, the hands ofthe sitters (or certain of their number) being placed on the table ofthe "Planchette. " The indicator moves over the line of letters, andindicates the letters of the message, one by one. The Ouija Boards aresold at a moderate price, and will be found a valuable adjunct to anyspiritualistic circle. During the past few years, public attention hasbeen strongly directed to this manner of obtaining spirit communicationsby reason of newspaper notices concerning the same, and the fact thatseveral books have been written under spirit guidance imparted in thisparticular way. 

A Home-Made Ouija Board. 

A writer has given the following directions for making a "home-madeOuija Board, " viz. , "A Planchette may be used as an 'Ouija' by layingdown a sheet of paper upon which the letters of the alphabet have beenwritten or printed in a fairly large semi-circle, the words 'Yes' or'No' being written at either end, and figures from 1 to 9 writtenstraight across a little lower down. Now remove the pencil and insert asmall moderately sharpened stick as a pointer, and the Planchette mayrun about, point to letters or numbers, answers your questions at 'Yes'or 'No, ' or messages may be spelt out as you watch its movements. "

Trance or Inspirational Mediumship. 

Through the development and unfoldment afforded by the developmentcircle, the mediumistic persons in that circle, particularly the mediumwho is "sitting for development" in the circle, will in all probabilitydevelop that phase of mediumship caller "Trance Mediumship, " or"Inspirational Mediumship. " Of this phase of mediumship a writer hassaid: "This mental phase of mediumship involves the development of adegree of impressibility which may range from the conscious reception ofsuggestion, or impulses, or thoughts from other intelligences, to thelucidity on the spiritual plane which is displayed by consciousclear-seeing, or spirit-sight. The phenomena of super-sensuous receptiondue to spirit influence are elicited in much the same way as a mesmeristarouses the clairvoyant powers of his subject. The somnambulic sleep, ortrance, is induced in the subject whose voluntary powers are no longerunder his control, and the involuntary processes are well-nighsuspended. In this state his spirit sometimes gains a larger degree offreedom, and is able to perceive on the inner or spiritual plane. 

Symptoms of Trance Condition. 

"If you are likely to become a trance-speaking medium, you will probablyexperience a sensation as a falling or dizziness, as if you were goingto faint; this may continue until you become entirely unconscious on theexternal plane, and you will know no more until you regain your normalcondition, although, while under the influence of the operator, you mayhave been speaking more or less coherently. He may not, at first, beable to convey the exact impression he wishes to produce. His'suggestion' is not strong enough to set your involuntary nervesvibrating in just the way he desires; consequently his thought is nottransferred to you in a manner which insures faithful reproduction, andyou should not be disappointed because of such imperfect results at theoutset. If your mind is filled with the desire to succeed, you willbecome too self-conscious, and will thus destroy the very condition uponwhich success depends. "

The Entranced State. 

Another mediumistic writer says: "The entrancement usually takes placeall at once, and the entranced one passes into the realm ofcommunication with the spirits without much warning of any kind. Whenthe medium is entranced it is highly essential that there be nocommotion or fear expressed in thought or action in the circle. It mustbe remembered that the welfare of the medium depends a great deal on theconditions of the others present, and purity of thought and pleasantexpectation should be the first thing looked after when the entrancementoccurs. In passing into the trance, the medium usually grows very paleand acts not unlike a person going into a faint. But he or she must beallowed to pass behind the veil without any commotion. When theentrancement is accomplished, the manifestations may take place indifferent ways. There are, in fact, many forms of manifestationbelonging to this particular phase of mediumship, but they all comeunder the general rule and conditions. "

Trance Phenomena. 

Another writer has said: "In entering the trance condition ofmediumship, you will probably become semi-conscious, or perhaps almostcompletely unconscious. The influence will stimulate your breathing, which will become rapid and irregular; your eyes will close and you willbe unable to open them, and your hands and body may twitch and jerk asif you were being subjected to a series of galvanic shocks. The sittersshould keep calm and sympathetic, but they should check any tendency onthe part of the medium to undue noise, or violence, or absurdity. Youwill be aware of what you are doing, but will be unable to fullyexercise the will to interfere or try to stop. You will most likelybecome conscious of an impulse to do something, or to blurt out certainwords. If you resist, you will only make the task more difficult andhinder the attainment of the end you have in view. Your best course isto hold your judgment in suspense; so do not be hostile or critical, butact out your impressions. 

Entering the Trance. 

"Let the influence have its course--say what you feel you MUST say, andnever mind about your own state of consciousness. You will be much morelikely to pass into the unconsciousness of the trance (if you desire todo so) if you say, 'Now, spirit friend, I trust myself to you, and willyield my body and brain to your control, for you to do the best you canwith and through me. I am willing to co-operate with you for the timebeing, and trust you to do your utmost for the good of others. ' It isnot necessary that you should be utterly unconscious, although you maythink it is, to prove that another intelligence is operating upon andthrough you. The evidence of that fact will be displayed in the natureof the message and the unusual ability displayed by you when under thestimulating influence of the operator. 

Advice to Trance Mediums. 

"Most mediums find that their powers vary. Sometimes there seems to be ahigh degree of lucidity. The impressions which they receive are clearand strong; and the ideas seem to flow through them freely, and thequality of the inspirations is exhilarating, and they feel strengthenedand uplifted. But there are other days when they feel very much alone. The influence that affects them is weak; they get only hazy impressions, and there is a woeful lack of ideas. It seems as if the heavens werebrass, or that they themselves were unresponsive. They know not why, butwhatever they can 'lay hold of' to speak, or whatever the spirit peoplecan project into their sphere seems forced and incomplete. If you shouldever have these experiences, turn your attention to something else. Donot 'harp on one string' too much. Physical exercise, change of scene, social company, and rest, will soon restore your tone and renew yourpowers. "

Speaking Mediumship. 

In that form of Trance or Inspirational Mediumship generally known as"Speaking Mediumship, " the communicating spirit assumes partial orcomplete control of the vocal organs of the medium, and the spirit thendirectly addresses the circle or audience of listeners, just as he woulddo were he, himself, actually in the flesh confronting them and usinghis own vocal organs. In such addressing the spirit manifests many ofthe characteristics which distinguished him during his earth life. Themedium's voice is changed, and his manner takes on a quite differentform, i. E. , that of the spirit which he possessed in his own earth life. In fact, in some cases, it has actually been observed that the very bodyof the medium seemed to either shrink, or else enlarge, as if taking theform of the etheric framework of the controlling spirit. 

Public Speaking Under Control. 

A writer gives the following advice concerning Speaking Mediumship:"Should you be controlled to give public addresses, it will be best towithhold the name of the spirit who prompts or controls your utterances. Most intelligent spirits prefer to be known by their teachings, ratherthan by the names they bore when on earth. If the addresses are eloquentand beautiful, and the thoughts presented are good and true, they willbe acceptable on their own merits, and would not be one bit morevaluable because they were inspired by some well-known historicalpersons. Whereas, if you announce the name of a spirit, your hearers mayconsider that the address does not come up to the standard of theability displayed by that individual before he dies, and may discreditand discard the good that they might otherwise have found in yourutterances. "

Spirit Advice and Counsel. 

If spirits voluntarily tender you their advice upon business matters, especially if they are friends or relatives whom you know and trust, andwho, when here, were capable and experienced business people, you maywell give heed to their counsel, even though you may not feel it wise tofollow it; but do not make a practice of going to the spirits forinformation concerning trade or finance. Why should you expect that wiseand enlightened spirits should concern themselves about stocks andshares, commerce, or manufacturing? Probably they knew but little aboutthese things when they were here, and have no heed for such knowledgeover there; and it will be well for you to learn to live your own life, do your business, and accept the ordinary duties and responsibilitieswhich naturally devolve upon you. Let mediumship be a PART of youreducation and development, not the WHOLE. 

Impersonating Manifestations. 

It will often happen that some spirit will take control of the mediumfor the purpose of communicating with a friend present in the circle orAUDIENCE, and for the purpose of positively identifying himself to thatfriend, he may deem it necessary to cause you to impersonate himself ashe was during his earth life. In such cases you will experience apeculiar feeling of undergoing a complete transformation of personality, and often a dual-personality for the time being. Another instance ofthis kind is where a spirit wishing to communicate with friends, andthis being his first opportunity to manifest in the impersonating phase, he may yield to that peculiar psychic law which seems to operate in thedirection of causing a spirit, manifesting for the first time, to enacthis dying experiences, and to manifest a pantomimic reproduction of hislast hours preceding death. In such cases, the medium reproduces, in amost startlingly real manner, the movements, ways of breathing, coughing, gestures, ejaculations, and may even go so far as to utter the"last words" of the dying man whose spirit now controls the medium. Every medium should be prepared for an experience of this kind, for itwill sometimes completely upset a medium unfamiliar with it, and notknowing just what it all means. 

Incidents of Impersonations. 

In a case such as stated above, the medium will probably find himselfeither partially or completely conscious of what is being said and doneby the spirit through his body or vocal organs. He will naturally striveto escape the utterance of the strange cries, moans, vocal gasps andefforts, and the dead cries and farewell words of the dying man orwoman. Some mediums have felt at such times as if they were losing theirreason, and they have struggled to throw off the spirit control andinfluence in order to regain their mental balance. The best mediumsadvise the young mediums to keep as cool, calm, and collected aspossible in such cases, and not to allow themselves to becomepanic-stricken. A writer on the subject has said: "Trust to thesincerity of the spirit and the good sense of the sitters, and throw offyour fear. Yield obedience to your control, and neither help nor hinderit. Just do and say what you feel you HAVE to do or say, and leave theresults. You cannot, or should not, be held responsible for failure bythe sitters, if there is no recognition; and by responding and givingfree course to the suggestion, which reaches you as an impulse or mentalimpression, greater success will follow, and the development you seekwill be promoted. If, however, you find that the impersonations areuntrue, and the sitters are unable to interpret or recognize what you door say after you have followed out your impressions a number of times, then resist them with all your strength of will, and require from thespirit the proof of his identity in some other way. "

Incidents of Inspirational Mediumship. 

Another writer speaking concerning inspirational mediumship, has said:"In inspirational speaking it will be noted that the medium often givesa really wonderful speech, although he may naturally be a very poorconversationalist. These speeches are often preserved and some of themform exceptionally interesting literature. These speeches are generallygiven when the medium is seated, but sometimes he loses balance andfalls to the floor. Still, as long as the spirit control has anything tosay, he will say it through the vocal organs of the medium. But it mustalways be borne in mind that a medium does not, as a general rule, become an inspirational speaker all at once. There is a stage ofdevelopment through which he must pass in which the spirit controlassumes charge of the body of the medium, and this takes some time andis usually accomplished in steps. First, the medium gives evidence ofinspirational speaking by uttering guttural sounds, and very often hismouth merely moves without giving forth any sound whatever. Little bylittle the control gains access to the inner atmosphere of the medium, and when he has broken the final barriers, he can speak and act anddeliver what he has to say. But it must be remembered that the mind ofthe medium is not to be left out of the question entirely. He is oftencalled upon to aid in the interpretation of the speeches the spiritdelivers, and these he may misinterpret and lend to them color of hisown mentality, without his conscious intention to do so, however. "

Value of Identification. 

In impersonation mediumship, however, no matter how interesting themanifestation may be, it is of prime importance that the identity of thespirit should be clearly established, providing that the spirit himselfclaims positively to be some particular individual; this, of course, does not apply to instances in which the spirit does not claim identitywith any particular departed person, and where the communications aregiven anonymously. It is this feature of identification that rendersthis phase of mediumship so valuable and important. A well-knownmedium, in a trance state, once delivered the following message from aspirit: "Impersonation mediumship is the most valuable that the worldcan possibly have today. When by the aid of the impersonating medium, the inquirer is enabled to converse with his beloved deceased friends, and they make themselves actually visible in the personality of themedium, plain to consciousness and understanding, and tell himspecifically points and facts of identity and experience that areutterly beyond the power of any other intelligence to tell, then he hassomething borne in upon him through the senses of sight, of hearing andunderstanding that appeals to him. Therefore, the impersonating mediumis the most valuable medium you can present to inquirers. " Anothermediumistic writer has said: "This kind of mediumship carries convictionof the real presence of the so-called dead, and your aim should be toget into communication with the intelligent operator at the other end ofthe line, and elicit from him evidences of his identity and purpose. Table movements, raps, materializations, writings, messages, orcontrols, are of comparatively little value unless by their agency youcan secure proofs of the personal identity and survival after death ofyour departed friends, or some indications of a rational purpose on thepart of the operator. "

Fraudulent Claims of Identity. 

We would be lacking in our sense of duty and obligation toward ourreaders, however, were we to refrain from calling their attention to thefact that positive and strict identification of the spirits, in caseswhere identity is claimed, is a duty on the part of investigators, particularly on the part of those who happen to be relatives or friendsof the deceased person whose presence and identity are being claimed bythe controlling spirit who is manifesting the impersonation. As we havesaid, elsewhere, we must remember that there are all kinds of decarnatespirits, just as there are all kinds of incarnate spirits; and that thenature of a spirit is not greatly changed by passing out of the body. Just as there are imposters on the earth plane, so are there imposterson the spirit plane. And, accordingly, caution is to be exercised onboth planes. The following quotations from mediumistic writers willserve to illustrate this point, and to show that the best mediumisticauthorities themselves insist upon this precaution being taken. 

Guarding Against Fraudulent Spirits. 

One writer says: "While most mediums seek for some guide or control ofprominence, it must not be always taken for granted that the controllingspirit during a seance is always just what he claims to be. Forinstance, a spirit control might give his name as Henry Clay, and hemight deliver a spirited talk or oration, which, however, would bereeking with grammatical errors. Even though he insist that he is HenryClay, our reason will tell us that he is not what he pretends to be. Thechange which we call death cannot lead all spirits to reform, and thereare many who, as in earth life, are unworthy of our association, andshould be gotten rid of as soon as they appear. When these fraudulentspirits appear, the atmosphere of the circle should be made very sacredand high in character. Evil spirits, and those of low characters, cannot endure the presence of elevated and high thoughts, and by theholding of thoughts of this character the circle can soon rid itself forgood of these troublesome entities--and it should do so without fail. "

Spirit Jokers. 

Another writer says, on this point: "That there are spirits whosometimes impersonate, and seek to pass themselves off as friends of thesitters, cannot be denied; in fact, we have had personal proof of thesame on several occasions. But these troublesome and vexatious visitorsinvariably get 'bowled out' if the investigators are observant andcareful. In fact, such entities are neither as numerous, or as evillydisposed, as many persons imagine them to be. There are spirits who'play up to' the weaknesses and flatter the vanity of those to whom theycommunicate. And it is equally true that there are spirits who giveglowing assurances of the good things that they will perform by-and-by, and profess to be some of the 'great ones' of the past, is equally true. It is a well-known saying that 'people love a lord, ' and this amiableweakness is fully realized by the jokers on the other side--but thefault does not wholly rest with them! Their too confiding and credulousmediums are too often in the main responsible for their ownmystification and misleading. They are often so anxious to be guided bysome 'eminent' person who will be to them an 'authority, ' that theypractically invite spirit pretenders to fool them to the top of theirbent. This does not apply to all cases of real or supposed deception, but it does cover a large proportion of such experiences. In manyinstances there is an element of self-deception--or auto-suggestion--andthe 'wish becomes father to the thought, ' and the sensitive medium'sunrestrained imaginative powers do the rest. "

A Typical Case of Identification. 

The following typical case of undoubted identification of a visitingspirit is related by Smedley in his work concerning spiritualisticexperiences, and may be taken as a pattern to be followed byinvestigators in demanding and obtaining proofs of identity in caseswhere same is asserted. The medium in this case was a woman of highstanding in spiritualistic circles, and the seance took place in Mr. Smedley's own home. The medium was at that time a perfect stranger tothe Smedley family, and to their little circle of invited friends. Theseance was opened by the singing of hymns, and before long the mediumwent under control. Mr. Smedley says: "She passed under the control ofan intelligent being, opened her eyes, and manifested the greatestamazement. " He then relates the subsequent experience as follows:

Recalling Past Incidents. 

"After looking around the room very deliberately at various objects, then at one person after another, and fixing her eyes on my wife, sheran across the room, and throwing her arms around my wife's neck, shekissed her most affectionately, addressing her as 'My dear sister. 'After speaking with my wife in endearing terms, she came across the roomto me, and placing her right hand on my shoulder, said: 'Well, my dearbrother. ' (This was exactly as a deceased sister of my wife had been inthe habit of doing. ) 'How unspeakingly glad I am for such a privilege asthis! When we used to sit by the hearth at night, conversing on varioustopics that used to interest us so much, we little expected we shouldever have such a privilege. You know we used to sit up at nightdiscussing theological questions till the embers in the grate died out, and sometimes a chiding voice from upstairs cried out: "Alfred, Alfred, do come to bed. Do you know what time it is? You know Charlotte is notfit to sit up so late. "' This was precisely what had taken place, theexact words being used. 

Identifying Property. 

"She referred to a number of incidents known only to her and ourselves. She asked for an album in which she had written the dedication, pointingthis out, and also various pieces of poetry she had written in it. Sheasked for a hymn-book, and desired us to sing what had been her favoritehymn, which at my request she instantly found. She next asked for aBible, and asked me to read her favorite Psalm. I requested her to findit, although I knew well which it was. She turned to it instantly, and Iread: 'The Lord is my shepherd, ' etc. When the Psalm was finished, themedium stood transfigured before us; her countenance was radiant, andher eyes bright with a heavenly light. Turning to my wife, she said:'Sister, dear, by inviting strangers to your house tonight you haveentertained angels unawares!' After the meeting, the medium remarked:'When under control I was strongly influenced to look around for apicture, but could not find it. I do not know what it meant, but thecontrol was anxious to find a picture. ' My wife replied: 'My sisterpainted a picture of the Saviour bearing His cross, many years ago, andit now hangs in our dining room. ' The above incidents, combined with hermannerisms, and bearing in mind that the medium was an entire strangerto us, and uneducated, were sufficient evidence of the presence andinfluence of her deceased sister to cause my wife to exclaim, 'OF ATRUTH, THAT WAS MY SISTER CHARLOTTE!'"

Identifying Historical Personages. 

Of course, a close, personal identification, similar to that stated inthe above recital, is impossible in cases when the spirit claims to besome well-known historical personage. But in the last named class ofcases it will be found possible to ask questions concerning the life andcareer of the supposed celebrity, and to form a general idea of thecorrectness of the claim by the quality and general character of theanswers given. It will be found that genuine spirits are nearly alwaysanxious to definitely establish the truth of their claims to identity, and will often go to great pains to do so. The character of the languageemployed, the grammar followed, and the general evidence of theintellectual capacity of the spirit, all these will be found useful intesting cases of claimed identity; and no genuine spirit has any justcause to object to such tests and questions, if made in the properscientific spirit, and with ordinary politeness. In short, treat thespirit just as you would were he in the flesh, speaking to you over atelephone, and endeavoring to establish his identity; this will alwaysbe a safe and just rule to employ and follow. 

PART XI

HIGHER SPIRIT MANIFESTATIONS

We frequently hear of, and witness manifestations of, what is called"spirit psychometry, " "spirit clairvoyance, " and "spirit clairaudience. "In the earlier chapters of the present book we have spoken of thepsychic principles and laws underlying psychometry, clairvoyance, andclairaudience. We have seen that all of these forms and phases ofpsychic phenomena are capable of being produced independent of spiritguidance, control, or influence. In fact, most of such manifestationsare so produced, even when they are considered to be phases of spiritmediumship. But, outside of these manifestations, there are found casesin which such phenomena are produced by the aid, influence, andassistance, if not indeed the direct power of, the controlling spiritsof the medium. 

Spirit Psychometry and Clairvoyance. 

In those instances in which the controlling influence of such phenomenais clearly that of disembodied spirits, we find two distinct classes ofthe same, as follows: (1) cases in which the spirits aided in theestablishing of the psychic rapport, and thus rendered more efficient, clear, and strong; (2) cases in which the spirits exerted their ownpsychometric, clairvoyant or clairaudient power, and then communicatedthe result through their mediums to the circle. In the first of aboveclasses, the psychic faculties of the medium really perform the work, although greatly aided by the addition of the psychic power of thespirit. In the second of the above classes, the work is performed solelyby the psychic powers of the spirits, and the medium acts merely as theline of communication between spirit and the circle. It must beremembered that the spirits who have passed out of the body arepossessed of the same order of psychic faculties as are those still inthe body, and that, likewise, on both planes there is a great variationof the degree of such powers between different individuals. 

Spirit Psychic Assistance. 

From the above, it will be seen that a mediumistic person may practicein psychometry, clairvoyance, and clairaudience, either with or withoutthe assistance of the spirits. In case the spirits are assisting in thedirection of performing the psychic work themselves, and thencommunicating the result to the medium, the medium of course has but toremain passive and receive the communication. In cases, however, inwhich the spirits assist merely by strengthening the psychic power ofthe medium by aiding in the production of the rapport conditions, or bylending the psychic power to add to that of the medium, then the mediumhas but to proceed just as we have pointed out in the earlier portionsof this book devoted to the subjects of psychometry, clairvoyance, etc. 

Writing Mediumship. 

In what is known as "writing mediumship" the medium's hand is controlledby the spirit, and is caused to write messages to those present, or toanswer questions propounded by some of those present at the circle. Insome quarters such writing is called "automatic writing, " but inasmuchas this last term is also applied to cases in which the hand of theperson writes a message telepathed by a living person, it would seemthat the old term "writing mediumship" is still the best one to use inthe cases in which the spirit control is using the hand of the mediumfor the purpose of communication. The following statements made bydifferent mediumistic writers on this particular subject will proveinteresting and instructive to the young mediums seeking developmentalong the lines of this special phase of mediumship. 

Incidents of Writing Mediumship. 

One writer says: "If the medium reaches the writing stage, he generallypasses into it in much the same manner that he does into theinspirational speaking. That is, he becomes entranced, and inentrancement of this kind he usually loses his conscious self, althoughit is not essential that he should do so. He may remain partiallyconscious, but he will be very pale and will have no control whateverover the hand which does the writing. When the hand that writes isgenerally the only part of him that becomes numb, one entire side maybecome limp and inactive, and it is at this stage that a pencil must beplaced in his hand all ready for writing, and a large sheet of heavypaper be put on the table before him. It is urged that the pencil be aheavy one, and the paper tough and coarse, for the first writing of awriting medium is not even a fair specimen of penmanship, being heavyand very difficult to decipher. As his hand wanders here and there, hisbody may sway and the pencil be brought in contact with the paper. Whenhe begins to write, the strokes are crude and jerky and uncertain. Thefirst notes that he delivers to the sitters are very often difficult tomake out, and sometimes it is impossible to tell what they are. But thiscondition will be gradually overcome until the writing is very fair, andfinally it can be written on much finer paper and with an ordinarypencil. When questions are to be asked, they may be put direct to themedium, and the answers will be written out and signed by the spiritsending them. As the medium develops, it will not be necessary for himto have the questions put to him verbally. Write the questions on alittle slip of paper, and place these slips in his hands. The spiritwill read them, and then use his arm as before in writing out answers. But this stage cannot be attained in a day or a week, and it is a signof the higher forms of development, and should be looked upon by themembers of the circle as evidence of the highest order establishing thegreat success they have attained. "

Developing Writing Mediumship. 

Another writer on the subject of writing mediumship says to thosedeveloping this phase of mediumship: "Your hands may be caused to shakeand move about as if you desired to write. You may be quite conscious, or only semi-conscious, but you will feel that you are unable to preventthe movements. In such a case, the sitters should provide pencil andpaper and await results. They should speak to the control and requesthim to work quietly, and in all probability the rapid preliminaryscrawls will soon give place to slower and more legible writing. Manypersons have developed as writing mediums who have never sat in acircle, and without being entranced. We should advise you, if you decideto sit alone and make experiments in this direction, to avoidexcitement, expectancy, and preconceptions. Proceed as though you werespeaking to a visible friend, and request that someone will move yourhands to write. Provide yourself with a writing pad, or several sheetsof paper, and while holding a pencil in readiness, withdraw yourthoughts from your hand and arm, and assume a passive condition. If youare strongly mediumistic, words and sentences may be written, but youneed hardly expect such results at first. "

Stead's Method and Results. 

W. T. Stead, the eminent English investigator, said: "I hold my pen inthe ordinary way, but when the writing is beginning I do not rest mywrist or arm upon the paper, so as to avoid the friction, and to givethe influence, whatever it may be, more complete control of the pen. Atfirst, the pen is apt to wander into mere scrawling, but after a time itwrites legibly. Unlike many automatic writers who write as wellblindfolded as when they read what they write as they are writing it, Ican never write so well as when I see the words as they come. There isdanger in this, which is most clearly illustrated When my hand writesverse--especially rhymed verse--for the last word in each line suggeststo my conscious mind a possible rhyme for the ending of the followingline; this rouses up my mind, my own ideas get mixed with those of thecommunicating intelligence, and confusion is the result. " The abovestatement of Mr. Stead becomes doubly interesting and valuable when weremember that through his hand, controlled by a spirit intelligence, came that wonderful series of messages afterward published under thetitle of "Letters from Julia, " which book excited the attention andinterest of the civilized world at the time of its publication, and evento this day enjoys a great popularity. 

Automatic Writing vs. Inspirational Writing. 

Another writer says: "Inspirational or impressional writing isfrequently mistaken for that which is more purely passive or automatic. The medium or sensitive person experiences a strong impulse to write, but does not receive any clear or consecutive train of thought. He setsdown one word, and then others follow as fast as he can indicate them, but he must begin to write before the complete sentence is given to him. In other cases, the thoughts flow into his consciousness faster than hispen can record them; but in the truly 'automatic' form of communicationthe mind of the sensitive is not consciously affected. He can read andthink about other and entirely different subjects, and need take no moreinterest in the work than he would if his hand did not belong to him northan if a spirit laid hold of and guided the pencil. Some mediums whowrite automatically have to be mentally quiet; they find that if themind is preoccupied the hand will not write, although, even in suchcases, it frequently happens that the amanuensis is ignorant of thecommunication until he reads it afterwards. "

Use and Abuse of Automatic Writing. 

J. A. White, a trance and clairvoyant medium himself, says of the phaseof writing mediumship: "There is a great tendency, particularly in casesof automatic writing, to do too much of it. No sooner do some peoplefind that the pencil will move, than they spend all their spare time inthis fascinating pursuit, which, in their undeveloped state, I believeto be a dangerous and unwise practice. They are apt to exclaim, when anyquestion arises during the day: 'Let us see what the spirits have tosay. ' This, carried to extremes, leads to one thing, and one thingonly--obsession. I believe in fixing a time, and, unless in exceptionalcases, refusing to sit at any other. Of course I am speaking ofmediumship when it is in its budding stage. A developed medium can judgefor himself, and knows from experience how far to go. It is a favoritetrick of a certain class of spirits when they find they have a sensitivewho can 'feel' them, to give them that pricking sensation in the armwhich denotes their presence. 'So-and-so wants to write, ' and awayrushes the medium for the pencil, and sits down. This I do not believein. I have seen far more harm than good come from it. The proper way todevelop, in my opinion, is to sit at home in a small, carefully selectedcircle, two or three times a week, at stated hours, and with a competentconductor who knows what he is doing. "

Advice to Writing Mediums. 

A French medium says: "We urge beginners in their own interest not totake up the pencil for automatic writing, or to sit at a table forcommunications at any free moment, without rhyme or reason, for disorderin experiment is one of the first and most serious dangers to beavoided. An absolutely strict rule should be made not to attempt theeffort more than once every other day. " Another writer says: "Thecommunications that are received by the various forms of passive, impressional, automatic, and inspirational writing must not be regardedas valuable merely because of the conditions under which they wereobtained, nor because of their spirit origin, real or supposed. Underall circumstances receive with the utmost reserve and cautionlong-winded communications from notable characters who claim to be'Napoleon Bonaparte, ' 'Lord Bacon, ' 'Socrates, ' or other greatpersonages; for in the majority of cases, the value of the communicationis exactly the reverse of the importance of the name attached. Thisapplies to automatic writings quite as much as to spoken messages. Judgethe statement made by the ordinary standards, apart from their claimedexalted origin. If rational, beautiful, and spiritually helpful andenlightening, they are worth having on their own merits; but if theyare unreasonable, wild or dogmatic, or pretentious and flattering, theyshould be discarded; and, unless you change their character afterrepeated experiments, your attention should be turned in some otherdirection. "

Drawing Mediumship. 

What is known as "drawing mediumship" is but a variation of writingmediumship, at least so far as is concerned the nature of themanifestation. In both cases the spirit control moves the hand of themedium, in one case forming letters and words, and in the other caseforming figures, designs, etc. In some rare instances, the spiritcontrol operating through the hand of the medium has produced crayondrawings, water color sketches, and even oil paintings, although themedium himself or herself, was unable to even draw a straight line, muchless to execute a finished drawing or painting. The principle governingsuch mediumship, and the development, thereof, is precisely the same asthat governing the phase of writing mediumship previously described. 

The Planchette. 

From time to time, during the past fifty years, there have been inventedor arranged various forms of mechanical contrivances designed to assistin the development of writing mediumship. The most popular of these hasbeen the Planchette, which has enjoyed great popularity for many yearspast. The Planchette is a little heart-shaped board, having two legs, with tiny wheels at the end, attached to the board. Near the pointed endof the heart-shaped board is a hole, into which a pencil is inserted. Asheet of paper of good size is spread upon a table, and the Planchetteis placed thereupon. Then the sitter, or two sitters, place their handor hands upon the board--generally resting only the tips of theirfingers lightly upon it. The sitter or sitters then await results. 

How to Use the Planchette. 

If the sitter is mediumistic the Planchette will begin to move aboutslowly at first, gradually gathering force and definite direction. Aftera few preliminary strokes, circles, or lines having been drawn, thePlanchette will seem to have been firmly taken hold of by some spirithand, and will begin to write words and sentences in a more or less'scrawly' fashion. When the writing once begins, questions may be askedof and answered by the spirits. Some persons report that to them thePlanchette seems to move by itself, pulling their hands with it; butothers report that they feel the movement of their arms and hands, asthe spirit propels the machine in the work of waiting. Some know what isbeing written during the process, while others do not know what has beenwritten until they afterwards read it. Sometimes the writing begins Boonafter the sitting is commenced, while in other cases the sitters have towait a long time, or even to sit several times before the writingactually begins. Sometimes the Planchette will refuse to write forcertain persons, but will write freely for others. The general advice isto exercise patience in the Planchette sittings, and not to expect toget the best results at once; and, particularly, not to begin askingquestions immediately after the writing begins. 

Healing Mediumship. 

Some mediums seem to be particularly adapted to the work of healing bypsychic force, and this phase of mediumship is known as "healingmediumship. " The healing medium is guided principally by the spiritinfluence, so far as is concerned the choice of methods of procedure inhis healing work. The following directions, however, given by amediumistic writer, will give the young medium a very good, practicalgeneral idea of the procedure to be followed in case his spirit controldoes not indicate some other method. This writer says:

How to Heal by Spirit Power. 

"If you are impressed with the idea that you possess healing power, youcan easily experiment upon your suffering friends or acquaintances. Ifyou are mediumistic, and spirits desire to develop you for the healingwork, you will readily feel that you are impressed what to do. Yourhands will be guided to the proper position, and you will spontaneouslymake the requisite passes. Magnetic healing has really nothing to dowith massage, the induction of sleep, or with any form of mesmerism orhypnotism. The healing medium should centre his thought and interestsolely and wholly with the idea of effecting a cure. He will need to besympathetic, but hopeful. Do not let your patient think about hisailments, but arouse his thought and engage his attention upon someoutside subject. Make him feel comfortable, and lead him to expect goodresults; to do this you must be affirmative and confident. Unless youare impressed, or are controlled, to do otherwise, sit in front and takehold of the hands of the sufferer for a time, then make gentle, short, downward passes over the part affected, and conclude with long sweepingpasses from head to foot without contact. For local affections, pointyour hands at or just touch the spot with your finger tips, or makedirect horizontal or slightly downward movements, as if you werethrowing something at him. A warm, comfortable room is favorable tomagnetizing, and a genial mental atmosphere, created by cheerful andkindly minds in the operator and persons present, will contributelargely to the success of the treatment. You will do well to act uponyour impressions and make the passes in whatever way you feel impelledor compelled. If you operate under spirit guidance, you will beimpressed more or less clearly how to proceed in each case. In allprobability you may sympathetically 'take on, ' and be affected by, thesymptoms of the disease from which the patient suffers, and in that waybe able to form an accurate diagnosis of the case; but you must guardagainst exhaustion, and should always 'throw off' from yourself theinfluence that you have received, and wash your hands thoroughly aftereach treatment. "

Materialization Mediumship. 

One of the rarest, and at the same time the most eagerly sought afterphase of mediumship, is that known as "materialization mediumship. " Inthis phase of mediumship the decarnate spirit is able to draw upon thevital forces of the medium, and those present at the seance, to sucheffect that it may clothe itself with a tenuous, subtle form of matter, and then exhibit itself to the sitters in the same form and appearancethat it had previously presented in its earth life. Many of the mostremarkable testimonies to the truth and validity of spiritualism havebeen obtained through this phase of mediumship, and it is the aim of allinvestigators to witness, and of most mediums to be the channel of theproduction of, this remarkable phase of mediumistic phenomena. 

In almost all instances of materialization phenomena in the record ofmodern spiritualism we find that a cabinet was employed. There are twomain reasons advanced for the necessity of the cabinet in this phase ofmediumistic phenomena. The first of said reasons is that in many casesdarkness has been found necessary for the preliminary work of thematerialization, although absolute darkness is not necessary in thegeneral room in which the materialized spirit forms afterward appear. The second of the said reasons is that there seems to be a psychicatmosphere created by the blending of the spirit forces with those ofthe medium, which atmosphere must be kept apart from and unmixed withthe auras of the members of the outside circle or the general visitorsat the seance. 

Why the Cabinet Is Necessary. 

Just what is the technical reason for this necessity is a source ofargument and dispute among the different authorities on the subject, and it may be said that the matter is not as yet definitely settled. Butwhatever may be such technical explanation, the fact remains that theseclusion of the medium has been found almost absolutely necessary forthe production of the phenomena of spirit materialization. The fewexceptions noted in the history of modern spiritualism only go toestablish the general rule. For the purpose of a general study of thesubject, it may be accepted as a general fact that the production ofspirit materialization has as one of its necessary conditions thepresence and use of a dark cabinet in which the medium is secluded fromthe circle or assemblage of persons attending the seance. 

How to Make the Spirit Cabinet. 

One of the best kind of cabinets for this purpose is a small alcoveroom, or other small room adjoining the room in which the visitors sitat the seance. A large closet will also answer the purpose very well, infact many mediums prefer the closet to any other form of cabinet. Ifneither small room or closet is available, then it becomes necessary tobuild or erect a cabinet for the medium. One of the simplest and leastexpensive methods of building or erecting a cabinet for the medium is asfollows: Take a large piece of dark cloth, cotton or woolen, or else alarge shawl, and fasten it by stout twine or cord across a corner of theroom. It will be better if the curtain is made in two pieces, so as toallow it to part in the middle for the purpose of the entry and exit ofthe medium, and for the purpose of allowing the materialized spirit formto show itself to the circle. It is not necessary that all light beexcluded from the cabinet, and therefore it need cause no worriment if alittle light filters in over the top of the curtain; but the lights inthe main room should be kept burning "dim and low, " not only for thepurpose of aiding in the actual work or materialization, but also inorder to preserve the proper conditions when the materialized spiritpresents itself between the opened curtains. 

How to Use the Spirit Cabinet. 

When the cabinet is properly arranged the medium enters it and sits downon a chair provided for that purpose. He should not be disturbedthereafter, but should be encouraged and aided in his work by themaintenance of a quite, reverent mental attitude on the part of themembers of the circle. It will be found helpful if a few hymns are sungwhile waiting for manifestations from the cabinet. The best way toencourage materialization at a regular circle is for gradual steps to betaken leading up to this high phase of phenomena. For example, thecircle should sit in the ordinary way at its regular meetings, anddevote itself to the production of the lesser forms of phenomena. Then, before adjournment, the medium may go into the cabinet while the circlesits for materialization phenomena. This practice may be made to form aregular part of the proceedings of the circle. But the circle must bevery patient concerning the production of this class of phenomena, forthe necessary conditions are very difficult to develop, even when aidedby the most powerful spirits. Many sittings may be required before eventhe slightest sign of materialization is obtained--but the final resultwill repay much waiting and watching, much patience and muchperseverance. But sooner or later the phenomena will come if the properconditions are provided for them. 

Spirit Phosphorescence. 

The first evidence of the presence and activity of the spirit forcesstriving to produce the phenomena and materialization will probably bethe appearance of peculiar hazy phosphorescent lights playing in frontof the curtain forming the front of the cabinet. These lights willconsist of small globules or balls of phosphorescent light that willdance about, like the familiar will-o'-the-wisp seen over swamps and indamp, woody places. These lights will flit here and there, willalternately appear and disappear. Sometimes they will appear as if amultitude of fire-flies were clustered in front of the curtain. Whenthese fire balls appear the circle may know that it is well on the wayto perfect materializations. 

Appearance of Materialized Substance. 

As the power increases, and the conditions become stabilized andperfected, the manifestations will become more pronounced. It oftenhappens that cloudy nebulous bodies of psychic substance are formed andfloat around in front of the cabinet, like clouds of steam or vaporillumined by a dim phosphorescent light. Sometimes attempts will seem tohave been made to form these clouds into the semblance of the humanbody, and often these bodies are more or less incomplete, as forinstance the arms may be missing, or else there may be dark holes wherethe eyes, nose, and mouth should be. It may be stated here that thesitters should not be frightened by these sights, nor should mentalagitation be permitted to manifest too strongly, as such conditions actto retard further developments. Sometimes perfect hands and armsmaterialize, but apparently not attached to a body. These hands mayfloat out over the circle, and may touch the members thereof. In rarecases these hands take articles handed them by members of the circle, which articles are then "dematerialized" and vanish from sight, afterward appearing in other parts of the house. Large articles offurniture have been known to be dematerialized in this way. 

Materialized Spirit Forms. 

Later on, the nebulous spirit forms will take on more definite lines andform, and will become more plainly visible, and will also assume a farmore "solid" appearance. When the phenomena reaches its highest phases, the materialized spirit forms can be plainly seen and actuallyrecognized by their friends in earth life. In some cases they willactually leave the front of the curtain and will walk down among thesitters, shaking hands with them, touching them on the cheek, or evenembracing some loved one. In rare cases these materialized forms areable to converse with the sitters in the circle, just as plainly as whenin earth life. 

Scientific Proof of Materialization. 

It is not the purpose of this book to prove the existence of mediumisticphenomena--rather it points out the means and methods whereby thestudent may obtain such proof for himself or herself. But it may besuggested here that the sceptic may find an abundance of proof of thegenuineness of materialization phenomena in the records and reports madeby eminent scientists, statesmen, and others. Particularly, the reportof Sir William Crookes, the eminent English scientist, will furnish suchproof to the inquirer who demands "scientific proof" before he willbelieve anything out of the usual. Sir William Crookes has givenconvincing evidence of the genuineness of spirit materialization, evengoing so far to offer records of the weight of materialized spirits, andtheir photographs taken by him--in some instances the photographsshowing the forms of both medium and spirit materialization. 

How to Conduct a Materializing Seance. 

In sitting for materialization, the circle should maintain the samegeneral demeanor that it observes at other times. Silence or dignifiedconversation may be indulged in, but joking or levity should beforbidden. Hands should be held, and reverent singing indulged in. Itshould be remembered that this phase of mediumistic phenomena is notsomething apart and distinct from the lesser phases which have beendescribed in detail in this book. On the contrary, it is simply a matterof degree, and the same general principles underlie all phases ofmediumistic phenomena. Therefore, it is not necessary to repeat theinstructions regarding the conduct of the circle, or the rules for thedevelopment of the medium. Read the earlier chapters for the same, whichare equally applicable in this place as in the places in which theyoriginally appeared. 

Trumpet Mediumship. 

In what is known as "trumpet mediumship, " the sound of the voice of thecommunicating spirit is increased in power by the use of a trumpetshaped arrangement of paper, card-board, tin, or aluminum. There is noparticular virtue in the material used, and anyone may make aserviceable trumpet out of heavy paper or thin card-board. The principleof the use of the "spirit trumpet" is precisely that of the well-knownmegaphone, i. E. , it MAGNIFIES the sound, and increases its carryingpower. A spirit speaking in the faintest whisper through the trumpet isenabled to have its voice heard plainly by those present in the circle, where otherwise nothing would be heard. Often the spirit force is sostrong that it will pick up the trumpet and carry it around the circle, tapping the various members thereof, and whispering through it into theear of some particular members. Weak spirits, therefore, who are unableto make themselves heard in the ordinary way, often employ the trumpetwith effect in seances. When the trumpet is used, it should be placed onthe table, awaiting the use of the spirits. 

Spirit Playing on Musical Instruments, Etc. 

The spirit forces also sometimes will see fit to play upon musicalinstruments placed in the cabinet with the medium, the guitar, mandolin, concertina, accordion, etc. , being the instruments preferred in suchcases. Of course the sceptics will claim that the medium may play theinstruments himself or herself, and thus give ground for the claim offraud; consequently in the case of public seances, and many privateones as well, the medium will insist upon having his or her hands tied, and other precautions taken to eliminate the possibility of fraud anddeception. Such precautions are in no way a reflection upon the medium, and are, in fact, demanded by many mediums as a matter of self-respect, self-protection, and the cause of truth. In many cases in which themediums were entirely lacking in musical education, knowledge, ortraining, the spirits have performed skilled selections of music uponthe instruments in the cabinet. 

Independent Slate Writing. 

What is generally known as "independent slate writing" is a veryinteresting phase of mediumship, and one of the peculiarities thereof isthat such phenomena is sometimes produced through mediums who seem topossess little or no mediumistic powers in other directions. Inindependent slate writing there is no employment of the hands of themedium by the spirit to form the letters, words, and sentences of thecommunication. On the contrary, the writing is done directly by thespirit forces, independent of the organism of the medium. Of course thepsychic power of the medium and his vital energy as well is drawn uponby the spirits in producing this form of manifestation, but the mediumis sometimes seated out of reach of the slates and in no case actuallytouches the pencil. 

The Slate Writing Circle. 

Independent slate writing is performed as follows: The circle selectstwo common slates, or else one folding slate. A small bit of chalk, or atiny piece of slate pencil is placed between the two slates, the latterbeing then placed tightly together, and then bound with thick, strongtwine--in some cases the ends of the twine are fastened with sealingwax. This trying and sealing is for the purpose of eliminating thesuspicion of fraud or deceit, and for the purpose of scientificallyestablishing the genuineness of the phenomena. The bound slates are thenplaced on the table in the middle of the circle. In some cases themedium rests his hands on the slate, and in other cases he keeps hishands entirely away from them--the phenomena itself evidently beingproduced with equal facility in either case. A written question mayeither be placed inside the slate on a small bit of paper, or elsesealed and placed on top of the tied slates. In some cases thescratching sound of the pencil may be heard proceeding from the tiedslates, while on others no sound is heard while the writing is beingdone. When the slates are opened, at the end of the seance, the slateswill be found to contain writing--the answer to the question, or else ageneral message to the circle--the writing sometimes consisting of but aword or two, while in other cases both of the inside surfaces of theslate will be found to be covered with writing. It often requires quitea number of sittings before this phase of phenomena is secured; in manycases it is never actually secured in a satisfactory form. 

Spirit Paintings. 

There are cases of record in which crayon drawings have been produced onthe slates by enclosing small bits of various colored crayons thereinwhen the slates are tied together. Again, oil paintings have beensecured on the slates, after small dabs of oil paint of various colorshave been placed on the inside surface of the slates, a little linseedoil being poured on each. 

Fraudulent Slate Writing. 

Slate phenomena has been brought into some degree of discredit anddisrepute during the past ten years or more, by reason of the fact thata number of unscrupulous "fakers, " or bogus-mediums, employed a systemwhere this class of phenomena was counterfeited by trick methods. But, as all careful investigators of mediumistic phenomena well know, somewonderful results are still obtained, quietly and without publicity ornotoriety, in many family or private circles. In this case, and in manyothers, the very best mediumistic phenomena is often produced in thosefamily or private circles, where mutual sympathy, harmony, and spiritualunderstanding prevail, and where there is an absence of the sceptical, cavilling, negative mental attitudes, which tend to interfere with thefree flow of spirit power and the degree of manifestation. The tinyflame burning on the family altars and in the private shrines serve tokeep alive the Light of the Spirit, which is too often dimmed by thepublic glare of counterfeit and sensational exhibitions of so-calledspirit power. 

Practical Advice to Developing Mediums. 

The young developing medium who has read the foregoing pages of thisbook will in all probability soon discover just what phase of mediumshipis best suited for his natural powers, temperament and psychicconstitution. As his innate psychic powers unfold and develop he will bealmost instinctively led in the particular directions in which thesepowers may find the opportunity for the best form of expression andmanifestation. And, at the same time, the spirit friends which the youngmedium will have drawn to himself will have discovered, by means ofexperimentation, just what phase of mediumship the young medium wouldbest develop in order to convey the messages and communications from thespirit side of life. The following bits of advice from mediumisticwriters of good standing will, however, perhaps serve to make the pathclearer for the young medium who is reaching out toward the best andmost efficient form of manifestation of the powers which he has foundare within himself. 

Need of Special Development. 

A writer says: "As a general rule, the best results of mediumship aresecured by special development along the lines of natural aptitude. A'Jack of all trades is master of none, ' and such a one is a failure inmediumship as in anything else. You may find it helpful to visit apublic medium who is already developed, and who can examine you and giveyou insight into your natural psychic powers, and counsel you regardingyour qualifications and aptitudes, and tell you what to do. But do notattach too much importance to directions received in that way, becauseso much depends upon the knowledge and power of the operator. One spiritmight use you with success in one direction, and another in some otherphase; just as one mesmerist may make a subject clairvoyant whenanother has previously attempted to do so and failed. Nothing but actualexperience will settle that point. If, however, after a reasonableamount of patient devotion to the experiment you do not succeed, or aredisappointed with what has been done, it will be advisable to effect achange in the conditions. A dissatisfied state of mind is a dangerousone. You may, if you choose, sit by yourself, and try to obtain tablemovements, or to get 'automatic' or passive writing. You can makeexperiments in psychometry or try crystal gazing, or endeavor tovisualize and to become clairaudient, but we should not advise you tosit alone and invite spirits to put you into the trance. It is better tojoin some good private circle. "

Advice to Discouraged Mediums. 

A writer gives the following excellent advice to young mediums who havebecome somewhat discouraged at their lack of success, and slowness ofprogress: "You have been already informed that you are a medium, andthat if you sit you will develop special gifts. But you may say: 'I havesat, and have not developed as I was assured I should. ' That is quiteprobable. The medium whom you consulted may have misjudged yourcapabilities; the spirit may have estimated what he could have done withor through you, and, from his point of view, may have been perfectlyaccurate; but possibly the spirits who have endeavored to develop youwere unable to succeed. People often say: 'I have been told many timesthat I should make a good medium, but I have not had satisfactoryresults. ' When we hear such statements we are prompt to ask: 'Have yousat for development for any length of time in a harmonious and congenialcircle? You cannot expect growth unless you give the requisiteconditions. You might as well anticipate a harvest without sowing theseed--just because you bought a sack of wheat! The marvelous resultsachieved by expert acrobats and athletes are due to their indomitabledetermination to succeed, and their steady and continuous training ofeye, and muscle, and nerve. They concentrate their attention and focusall their powers, and are at once temperate, patient, and persevering intheir experiments. The same spirit of devotion; the same firm attitudeand watchful attention to all the details; and the same observance ofthe conditions, physical, mental, moral, and spiritual, are needed ifyou would educate yourself and become a fit and serviceable instrumentfor exalted spirit intelligence to afford humanity the benefit of theirexperiences "over there. "'"

Avoid Cross-Magnetism. 

A popular mediumistic writer has given the following excellent words ofwarning to young mediums: "Do not go into public promiscuous 'developingcircles. ' There is always a danger of 'cross magnetism' and disorderlymanifestations in such gatherings. Owing to the mixed and inharmoniousmental, moral, and physical conditions which necessarily exist where anumber of strangers and curiosity seekers are attracted, you run therisk of being affected by undeveloped, unprincipled, frivolous, mercenary, self-assertive, or even immoral spirits, who, being attractedto such assemblies, seek to influence incautious and susceptible peoplewho ignorantly render themselves liable to their control. The people'on the other side' are human beings of all grades; they are not morallypurified by passing through the death-change; and as we are constantlysending into their other state 'all sorts and conditions of people, ' youneed not be at all surprised if you get into intercourse with the vainand foolish, the unreliable and pretentious, or the selfish and sinful, if you indiscriminately open the doors of your psychic self and give afree invitation to any spirit 'passer by. '"

Avoid Psychic Absorption. 

"You can waste your time, and you can sit in circles, absorb all kindsof psychological influences, exhaust your own, and in many cases becomeso filled up with contending influences that you are in a state ofpsychological fever all the time, or so exhaust yourself that you willbecome as limp and useless as a rag. This is not the way to use theopportunities you have; and you should avoid the injudicious, promiscuous, and insane methods of development of many who are extremelyanxious to develop you as a medium, and who often bring discredit uponthe subject of mediumship, and do no one the slightest practicalgood--not even themselves. We admit that the motives of those whoconduct public promiscuous developing circles are good in most cases, but their methods are frequently 'injudicious'--to put it mildly. Underordinary circumstances, your own pure purpose and the spirits who are insympathy with your exalted desires and intentions, are sufficientsafeguards against the intrusion of low, mischievous or maliciousspirits, but you should not venture into conditions which require thetrained and disciplined will, and the influence of wise and powerfulspirits to protect you against danger, until you have acquired theability to render yourself positive to the psychic spheres ofundesirable people, both in or out of the physical body, and canvoluntarily become passive and responsive to the true and trustworthyfriends whom you know and love. "

The Stewardship of Great Powers. 

We can not hope to more fitly close this book devoted to the briefpresentation of the facts of the psychic world, and the world of spirit, than by quoting the following words uttered by a faithful laborer in thevineyard of spiritualism: "Spiritualism helps us to understand the'unity of spirit' and 'the brotherhood of man' in the divinerelationship wherein the greatest among us is the servant of all. Thepossession of great gifts is an added responsibility. We are onlystewards of our powers on behalf or others, and our desire to gainknowledge and influence should be vitalized and dignified by theintention to use them to help, teach, and serve our fellows, and in suchservice we shall ourselves be blest. "

FINIS. 

 +--------------------------------------------------------------+ | Transcriber's Notes: | | | | Page 3: Interpretating amended to Interpenetrating; | | Tranformation amended to Transformation. "Unchartered | | Seas" _sic_ | | Page 4: Varities amended to Varieties | | Page 5: Full stop added after VII; Temperment amended to | | Temperament; It amended to Is | | Page 6: Phosphoresece amended to Phosphorescence | | Page 7: preceived amended to perceived | | Page 9: "Subnormal" _sic_; Byond amended to Beyond; | | opening quote marks added to "supernormal" | | Page 19: "subdivisions, and sub-divisions" _sic_ | | Page 20: occulists amended to occultists; terrestial | | amended to terrestrial. Missing closing quotes for | | quotation addedafter 'radiant energy. ' "Several great | | class" _sic_ | | Page 23: Kellar amended to Keller; duplicate "have" | | removed | | Page 24: Kellar amended to Keller | | Page 28: interpretating amended to interpreting; pagaent | | amended to pageant | | Page 29: preception amended to perception | | Page 30: duplicate word "of" removed | | Page 34: One instance of Ochorowicz, one instance of | | Ochoriwicz. Left as is | | Page 37: second comma in 400, 000, 000, 000, 000 removed; | | beyound amended to beyond; tremblngs amended to | | tremblings; eough amended to enough | | Page 40: wthout amended to without; phenoment amended | | to phenomena | | Page 41: Roetgen amended to Roentgen | | Page 42: senes amended to senses | | Page 45: duplicate line of text removed | | Page 50: menium amended to medium | | Page 51: transfrence amended to transference | | Page 54: thought-wives amended to thought-waves | | Page 57: coldenss amended to coldness | | Page 61: pheonmena amended to phenomena; beenficial | | amended to beneficial | | Page 63: a amended to at | | Page 66: resistence amended to resistance | | Page 68: implicity amended to implicitly | | Page 84: infinitessimal amended to infinitesimal | | Page 85: antedeluvian amended to antediluvian | | Page 92: Certain amended to Certainly; ont amended to not | | Page 94: mainfested amended to manifested | | Page 99: Symbollic amended to Symbolic; symbollically | | amended to symbolically; sudent amended to student | | Page 101: rendiiton amended to rendition | | Page 103: self-stupefication _sic_ | | Page 105: very amended to vary | | Page 109: occultist amended to occultists | | Page 120: "There is . .. Many degrees" _sic_ | | Page 123: unforseen amended to unforeseen | | Page 126: Section heading Absolute Time relocated from | | middle of paragraph; unescapable _sic_ | | Page 135: being amended to beings | | Page 136: Spritualism amended to Spiritualism | | Page 137: enlighted amended to enlightened | | Page 138: adherance amended to adherence | | Page 145: perseverence amended to perseverance; | | unconciously amended to unconsciously | | Page 155: occulists amended to occultists | | Page 160: produtcion amended to production | | Page 170: genearly amended to generally | | Page 174: Missing full stop added | | Page 174: fundmental amended to fundamental | | Page 182: "Materializations follows" _sic_ | | Page 185: parthway amended to pathway | | Page 186: "modus operana" _sic_ | | Page 187: apostrophe added to others | | Page 190: "personal composition" _sic_ | | Page 203: uninterupted amended to uninterrupted; | | Psyschic amended to Psychic | | Page 210: meduim amended to medium; coures amended to | | course | | Page 213: "finnicky" and "finnickiness" _sic_ | | Page 215: senuous amended to sensuous | | Page 219: healings amended to healing | | Page 223: phychic amended to psychic; "subject is" | | amended to "subject if" | | Page 225: comma after auto replaced with hyphen | | Page 232: showe amended to show | | Page 235: super-senous amended to super-sensuous | | Page 236: Condtiion amended to Condition | | Page 243: himeslf amended to himself | | Page 249: how amended to now | | Page 252: "clear and, " amended to "clear, and" | | Page 256: indicte amended to indicate | | Page 260: showly amended to slowly | | Page 265: materilaization amended to materialization | | Page 267: mediumsistic amended to mediumistic | | Page 268: phemonea amended to phenomena | | Page 269: accordian amended to accordion | | Page 270: State amended to Slate | | Page 276: ignoranty amended to ignorantly | | | | Small inconsistencies between the Table of Contents and | | the section titles, such as spelling, capitalization and | | hyphenation have been retained. In addition to these the | | following discrepancies are here noted, but have been | | retained: | | Page 3 Part I In the Table of Contents | | Super-sensible Vibrations should | | be followed by The Higher Vibrations. | | The Higher Senses of Man is The | | Higher Senses of Men on page 21. | | In the Table of Contents Discovery | | of New Worlds should be followed by | | Transcendental Senses. | | Part III The Categories of Thought is titled | | The Contagion of Thought on page 56. | | Page 4 In the Table of Contents Repelling | | Adverse Influences should be followed | | by Neutralizing Psychic Influences. | | Part IV Classification of Clairvoyant | | Phenomena is Classification According | | to General Distinctions on page 81. | | Part V In the Table of Contents Absolute | | Time should be followed by: The | | Occult Hypothesis. "The Prophecy of | | Cazotte. " The Dinner of the Elect. | | The Illuminatus. The Beginning of the | | Prophecy. The Shadow of the | | Guillotine. The Fall of the Great. | | The Fate of Royalty. The Fulfillment | | of the Prophecy. Other Historical | | Instances. The Eternal Verities. | | Page 5 Part VII Spirit Impersonation is titled Spirit | | Inspiration on page 165. | | Inspirational Speaking is titled | | Inspirational Writing on page 168. | | Part VIII In the Table of Contents The Jacob's | | Ladder of Communion should be | | followed by The Attainment of | | Excellence. | | Page 6 Part IX Difficulties Among Spirits is | | Differences Among Spirits on page | | 215. In the Table of Contents | | Self-Protection for Mediums should be | | followed by: Danger in Indiscriminate | | Magnetizing. Detrimental Magnetic | | Influence. Mediumistic | | Auto-Suggestion. "Psychic Sponges. " | | Investigate Your Spirits. Spirits Are | | Still Human Beings. Beware of | | Domineering Spirits. | | Part X Impersonating Manifestations does not | | appear in the text. | | Part XI In the Table of Contents Spirit | | Paintings should be followed by: | | Fraudulent Slate Writing. | | Practical Advice to Developing | | Mediums should be followed by: Need | | of Special Development. Advice to | | Discouraged Mediums. Avoid | | Cross-Magnetism. Avoid Psychic | | Absorption. The Stewardship of Great | | Powers. | | | | Section titles sometimes end with a full stop, and other | | times not: left as is. | | | | Quotation marks and hyphenation have generally been | | standardised. Where a word occurs an equal number of times | | as hyphenated and unhyphenated, both forms have been | | retained. Where two spellings of a word have been used (for | | example, magnetiser/magnetizer; skeptic/sceptic) both have | | been retained. | +--------------------------------------------------------------+